Update programs.texi and cc-mode.texi for new CC Mode features:
[bpt/emacs.git] / doc / misc / cc-mode.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
3 @c
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
5 @c
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
8 @c are significant.
9
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
16 @c 1: foo
17 @c 2: bar
18 @c ^ one space
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
22
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
24
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
28
29
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
35 @ignore
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
39 ## Info output
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
42
43 ## DVI output
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
46 ## manpage.
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
49
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
53
54 ## Plain text output
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
59
60 ## DocBook output
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
62 cc-mode.texi
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
65
66 ## XML output
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
68 cc-mode.texi
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
71
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
73
74 ## View DVI output
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
76
77 ## View HTML output
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
79 @end ignore
80
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
82 @finalout
83
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
86 @footnotestyle end
87
88 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
89 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
90 @c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
91 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g. with
92 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
93 @ifset XEMACS
94 @macro emacsman
95 xemacs
96 @end macro
97 @macro emacsmantitle
98 XEmacs User's Manual
99 @end macro
100 @macro lispref
101 lispref
102 @end macro
103 @macro lispreftitle
104 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
105 @end macro
106 @end ifset
107
108 @ifclear XEMACS
109 @macro emacsman
110 emacs
111 @end macro
112 @macro emacsmantitle
113 GNU Emacs Manual
114 @end macro
115 @macro lispref
116 elisp
117 @end macro
118 @macro lispreftitle
119 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
120 @end macro
121 @end ifclear
122
123
124 @macro ccmode
125 CC Mode
126 @end macro
127
128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
129 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
130 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
131 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
132
133
134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
135 @comment
136 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
137 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
138 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
139 @comment
140 @comment Authors:
141 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
142 @comment Martin Stjernholm
143 @comment Alan Mackenzie
144 @comment
145 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
146 @comment
147 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
148
149 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
150 @ifnottex @c In texi2dvi, the @defindex would create an empty cc-mode.ss
151 @c For Info, unlike tex, @syncodeindex needs a matching @defindex.
152 @defindex ss
153 @end ifnottex
154
155 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
156 @syncodeindex ss cp
157 @syncodeindex ky cp
158
159 @copying
160 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
161
162 Copyright @copyright{} 1995-2011 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
163
164 @quotation
165 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
166 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
167 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
168 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual'',
169 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license
170 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
171
172 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and
173 modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF supports it in
174 developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
175 @end quotation
176 @end copying
177
178 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
179 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
180 @dircategory Emacs editing modes
181 @direntry
182 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
183 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
184 @end direntry
185
186 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
187 @comment TeX title page
188 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
189
190 @titlepage
191 @sp 10
192
193 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.32}
194 @sp 2
195 @center @subtitlefont{A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages}
196 @sp 2
197 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
198
199 @page
200 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
201 @insertcopying
202
203 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which is distributed with Emacs,
204 or can be downloaded from @url{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/}.
205 @end titlepage
206
207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
208 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
209 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
210 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
211
212 @summarycontents
213 @contents
214
215 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
216 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
217
218 @ifnottex
219 @top @ccmode{}
220
221 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
222 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
223 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
224 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
225 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
226 functions, classes etc - there are other packages for that.
227
228 @insertcopying
229 @end ifnottex
230
231 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
232 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
233
234 @menu
235 * Introduction::
236 * Overview::
237 * Getting Started::
238 * Commands::
239 * Font Locking::
240 * Config Basics::
241 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
242 * Custom Auto-newlines::
243 * Clean-ups::
244 * Indentation Engine Basics::
245 * Customizing Indentation::
246 * Custom Macros::
247 * Odds and Ends::
248 * Sample .emacs File::
249 * Performance Issues::
250 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
251 * FAQ::
252 * Updating CC Mode::
253 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
254 * GNU Free Documentation License::
255 * Command and Function Index::
256 * Variable Index::
257 * Concept and Key Index::
258
259 @detailmenu
260 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
261
262 Commands
263
264 * Indentation Commands::
265 * Comment Commands::
266 * Movement Commands::
267 * Filling and Breaking::
268 * Minor Modes::
269 * Electric Keys::
270 * Auto-newlines::
271 * Hungry WS Deletion::
272 * Subword Movement::
273 * Other Commands::
274
275 Font Locking
276
277 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
278 * Faces::
279 * Doc Comments::
280 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
281
282 Configuration Basics
283
284 * CC Hooks::
285 * Style Variables::
286 * Styles::
287
288 Styles
289
290 * Built-in Styles::
291 * Choosing a Style::
292 * Adding Styles::
293 * Guessing the Style::
294 * File Styles::
295
296 Customizing Auto-newlines
297
298 * Hanging Braces::
299 * Hanging Colons::
300 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
301
302 Hanging Braces
303
304 * Custom Braces::
305
306 Indentation Engine Basics
307
308 * Syntactic Analysis::
309 * Syntactic Symbols::
310 * Indentation Calculation::
311
312 Syntactic Symbols
313
314 * Function Symbols::
315 * Class Symbols::
316 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
317 * Switch Statement Symbols::
318 * Brace List Symbols::
319 * External Scope Symbols::
320 * Paren List Symbols::
321 * Literal Symbols::
322 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
323 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
324 * Java Symbols::
325 * Statement Block Symbols::
326 * K&R Symbols::
327
328 Customizing Indentation
329
330 * c-offsets-alist::
331 * Interactive Customization::
332 * Line-Up Functions::
333 * Custom Line-Up::
334 * Other Indentation::
335
336 Line-Up Functions
337
338 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
339 * List Line-Up::
340 * Operator Line-Up::
341 * Comment Line-Up::
342 * Misc Line-Up::
343
344 Customizing Macros
345
346 * Macro Backslashes::
347 * Macros with ;::
348
349 @end detailmenu
350 @end menu
351
352 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
353 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
354 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
355 @chapter Introduction
356 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
357
358 @cindex BOCM
359 @cindex history
360 @cindex awk-mode.el
361 @cindex c-mode.el
362 @cindex c++-mode.el
363
364 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
365 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
366 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
367 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
368 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
369 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
370 in the (X)Emacs base.
371
372 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
373 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
374 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
375 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
376 originally contain the font lock support for its languages --- that
377 was added in version 5.30.
378
379 This manual describes @ccmode{}
380 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
381 version 5.32.
382 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
383
384 @ccmode{} supports the editing of K&R and ANSI C, C++, Objective-C,
385 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
386 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
387 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
388 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
389 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
390 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
391
392 @findex c-mode
393 @findex c++-mode
394 @findex objc-mode
395 @findex java-mode
396 @findex idl-mode
397 @findex pike-mode
398 @findex awk-mode
399 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
400 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
401 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
402 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
403 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
404 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
405 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
406
407 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
408 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
409 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
410 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
411
412 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
413 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
414 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
415 @chapter Overview of the Manual
416 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
417
418 @noindent
419 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
420 one).
421
422 @noindent
423 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
424 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
425
426 @itemize @bullet
427 @item
428 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
429 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
430 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
431 how to customize these features.
432
433 @item
434 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
435 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
436 over at a first reading.
437 @end itemize
438
439 @noindent
440 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
441 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
442 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
443 increasing detail.
444
445 @itemize @bullet
446 @item
447 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
448 customizations - whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
449 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
450 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
451
452 @item
453 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
454 features of @ccmode{}.
455
456 @item
457 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
458 in creating your own customization.
459 @end itemize
460
461 @noindent
462 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
463 into any of the previous chunks.
464
465 @itemize @bullet
466 @item
467 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
468 bugs/limitations.
469
470 @item
471 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
472
473 @item
474 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
475 project - whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
476 @end itemize
477
478 @noindent
479 Finally, there are the customary indices.
480
481 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
482 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
483 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
484 @chapter Getting Started
485 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
486
487 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
488 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
489 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
490 (see below).
491
492 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter
493 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
494
495 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
496 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
497 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
498 want to change:
499
500 @table @asis
501 @item c-basic-offset
502 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
503 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
504 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
505
506 @example
507 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
508 @end example
509
510 @item The (indentation) style
511 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
512 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
513 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
514 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
515 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
516 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
517 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
518
519 @example
520 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
521 (awk-mode . "awk")
522 (other . "linux")))
523 @end example
524
525 @item Electric Indentation
526 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
527 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
528 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
529 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
530 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
531 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
532 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
533
534 @example
535 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
536 @end example
537
538 @noindent
539 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
540 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
541
542 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
543 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
544 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
545 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
546 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
547 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
548
549 @example
550 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
551 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
552 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
553 @end example
554
555 @noindent
556 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
557 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
558 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
559 @end table
560
561 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
562 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
563 @code{desktop-read}.
564
565 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
566 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
567 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
568
569 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
570 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
571 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
572 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
573 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
574 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
575 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
576 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
577 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
578
579 @deffn Command c-version
580 @findex version (c-)
581 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
582 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
583 the echo area:
584
585 @example
586 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
587 @end example
588
589 @noindent
590 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
591 @end deffn
592
593 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
594 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
595 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
596 @chapter Commands
597 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
598
599 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
600 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
601 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
602 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
603 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
604 buffer, also do other things.
605
606 You might well want to review
607 @ifset XEMACS
608 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
609 @end ifset
610 @ifclear XEMACS
611 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
612 @end ifclear
613 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
614 structures.
615
616
617 @menu
618 * Indentation Commands::
619 * Comment Commands::
620 * Movement Commands::
621 * Filling and Breaking::
622 * Minor Modes::
623 * Electric Keys::
624 * Auto-newlines::
625 * Hungry WS Deletion::
626 * Subword Movement::
627 * Other Commands::
628 @end menu
629
630 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
631 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
632 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
633 @section Indentation Commands
634 @cindex indentation
635 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
636
637 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
638 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
639 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
640 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
641 of your changes.
642
643 @cindex GNU indent program
644 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
645 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
646 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
647 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
648 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
649 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
650
651 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
652 code, i.e. they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
653 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
654
655 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
656 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
657 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
658 hint about the syntactic context, i.e. whether the macro expands to an
659 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
660 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
661 out correctly most of the time, though.
662
663 Some macros, when invoked, ''have their own semicolon''. To get the
664 next line indented correctly, rather than as a continuation line,
665 @xref{Macros with ;}.
666
667 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
668 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
669 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
670
671 These commands indent code:
672
673 @table @asis
674 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
675 @kindex TAB
676 @findex c-indent-command
677 @findex indent-command (c-)
678 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
679 about it for normal use.
680
681 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
682 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
683 Basics}):
684
685 @itemize @bullet
686 @item
687 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
688 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
689 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
690 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
691 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
692 that begins at the line's left margin.
693
694 @item
695 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
696 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
697 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
698 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
699 @end itemize
700
701 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
702 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
703 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
704 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
705 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
706 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
707 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,, @emacsman{},
708 @emacsmantitle{}}.
709
710 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
711 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
712 @cindex literal
713 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
714 @itemize @bullet
715 @item
716 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
717 current line.
718 @item
719 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
720 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
721 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
722 spaces - see below) at point.
723 @item
724 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
725 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
726 @end itemize
727 @end defopt
728
729 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
730 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
731 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
732 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
733 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
734 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
735 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
736 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
737 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
738 hard tab stops when indenting.
739 @end defopt
740 @end table
741
742 @noindent
743 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
744 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
745 Basics}):
746 @itemize @bullet
747 @item
748 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
749 according to their syntactic context;
750 @item
751 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
752 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
753 very useful in this case.
754 @end itemize
755
756 @table @asis
757 @item @kbd{C-j} (@code{newline-and-indent})
758 @kindex C-j
759 @findex newline-and-indent
760 Inserts a newline and indents the new blank line, ready to start
761 typing. This is a standard (X)Emacs command.
762
763 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
764 @kindex C-M-q
765 @findex c-indent-exp
766 @findex indent-exp (c-)
767 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
768 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
769 you want to indent.
770
771 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
772 @kindex C-c C-q
773 @findex c-indent-defun
774 @findex indent-defun (c-)
775 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
776 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
777 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
778 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
779 must be complete, i.e. it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
780 brace.
781
782 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
783 @kindex C-M-\
784 @findex indent-region
785 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
786 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
787 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
788
789 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
790 @kindex C-M-h
791 @findex c-mark-function
792 @findex mark-function (c-)
793 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
794 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
795 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
796 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
797 @end table
798
799 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
800
801 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
802 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
803 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
804 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
805 @end defopt
806
807 @defopt c-progress-interval
808 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
809 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
810 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
811 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
812 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
813 @end defopt
814
815 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
816 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
817 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
818 @section Comment Commands
819 @cindex comments (insertion of)
820 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
821
822 @table @asis
823 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
824 @kindex C-c C-c
825 @findex comment-region
826 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
827 negative argument, it does the opposite - it deletes the comment
828 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
829 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
830 actually part of @ccmode{} - it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
831 convenience.
832
833 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
834 @kindex M-;
835 @findex comment-dwim
836 @findex indent-for-comment
837 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
838 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
839 @ifclear XEMACS
840 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
841 @end ifclear
842 @ifset XEMACS
843 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
844 @end ifset
845 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
846 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
847 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
848 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
849
850 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
851 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
852 @vindex comment-column
853 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
854 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
855 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
856 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
857 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
858 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
859 specified by @code{comment-column}.
860
861 See the documentation string for a full description of this
862 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
863 @end defopt
864
865 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
866 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
867 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
868 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
869 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
870 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
871 lines you can get that by setting
872 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
873
874 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
875 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
876 lines.
877 @end defopt
878 @end table
879
880 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
881 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
882 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
883 @section Movement Commands
884 @cindex movement
885 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
886
887 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
888
889 @table @asis
890 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
891 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
892 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
893 @findex c-end-of-defun
894 @vindex c-defun-tactic
895 @vindex defun-tactic (c-)
896
897 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
898 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
899 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
900 can give these commands a repeat count.
901
902 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
903 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
904 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
905 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
906 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
907 move at all.
908
909 By default, these commands will recognize functions contained within a
910 @dfn{declaration scope} such as a C++ @code{class} or @code{namespace}
911 construct, should the point start inside it. If @ccmode fails to find
912 function beginnings or ends inside the current declaration scope, it
913 will search the enclosing scopes. If you want @ccmode to recognize
914 functions only at the top level@footnote{this was @ccmode{}'s
915 behavior prior to version 5.32.}, set @code{c-defun-tactic} to
916 @code{t}.
917
918 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
919 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
920 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
921 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
922 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
923
924 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
925 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
926 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
927 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
928 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
929 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
930 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
931 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
932 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
933 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
934 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
935
936 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
937 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
938 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
939 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
940
941 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
942 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
943 @kindex M-a
944 @kindex M-e
945 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
946 @findex c-end-of-statement
947 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
948 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
949 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
950 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
951 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
952 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
953 means move over @var{n} statements.
954
955 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
956 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
957
958 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
959 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
960 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
961 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
962 strings.
963
964 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
965 @kindex C-c C-u
966 @findex c-up-conditional
967 @findex up-conditional (c-)
968 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
969 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
970 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
971 conditional.
972
973 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
974 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
975 forward.
976
977 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
978 preprocessor statements.
979
980 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
981 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
982 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
983 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
984 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
985
986 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
987 @findex c-down-conditional
988 @findex down-conditional (c-)
989 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
990 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
991 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
992 conditional.
993
994 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
995 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
996
997 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
998 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
999 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
1000 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
1001 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
1002
1003 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
1004 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
1005 @kindex C-c C-p
1006 @kindex C-c C-n
1007 @findex c-backward-conditional
1008 @findex c-forward-conditional
1009 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
1010 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
1011 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
1012 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
1013 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
1014
1015 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
1016 preprocessor statements.
1017
1018 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
1019 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
1020 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
1021 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
1022 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1023 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1024 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1025 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1026 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1027 underscores. E.g. @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1028
1029 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1030 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
1031 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
1032
1033 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
1034 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
1035 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1036 @end table
1037
1038 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1039 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
1040 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1041 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
1042 @cindex text filling
1043 @cindex line breaking
1044 @cindex comment handling
1045 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1046
1047 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1048 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1049 is to do it seamlessly, i.e. you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1050 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever
1051 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1052 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
1053 and so on.
1054
1055 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
1056 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
1057 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
1058 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1059
1060 @findex auto-fill-mode
1061 @cindex Auto Fill mode
1062 @cindex paragraph filling
1063 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1064 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto Fill,,,
1065 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g. with
1066 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1067 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1068 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
1069 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
1070 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
1071
1072 @table @asis
1073 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
1074 @kindex M-q
1075 @findex c-fill-paragraph
1076 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
1077 @cindex Javadoc markup
1078 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
1079 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
1080 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
1081 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
1082 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
1083
1084 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
1085 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
1086 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
1087 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
1088 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
1089
1090 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
1091 buffers.
1092
1093 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
1094 @kindex M-j
1095 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
1096 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
1097 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
1098 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
1099 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
1100 the line break. It is the replacement for
1101 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
1102
1103 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
1104 @findex c-context-line-break
1105 @findex context-line-break (c-)
1106 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
1107 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
1108 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
1109 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
1110 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
1111 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
1112 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
1113 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
1114 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
1115 valid.}.
1116
1117 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
1118 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
1119 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
1120 this function. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
1121
1122 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
1123 @findex c-context-open-line
1124 @findex context-open-line (c-)
1125 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1126 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e. it works just like
1127 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1128 line break.
1129 @end table
1130
1131
1132 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1133 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
1134 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1135 @section Minor Modes
1136 @cindex Minor Modes
1137 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1138
1139 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
1140 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
1141
1142 @table @asis
1143 @item electric mode
1144 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
1145 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
1146 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1147 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1148 @item auto-newline mode
1149 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1150 them yourself, e.g. after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1151 when electric mode is disabled.
1152 @item hungry-delete mode
1153 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
1154 key - for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
1155 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
1156 last statement.
1157 @item subword mode
1158 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1159 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1160 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1161 E.g. @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1162 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1163 @item syntactic-indentation mode
1164 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
1165 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
1166 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
1167 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
1168 of `c-basic-offset'.
1169 @end table
1170
1171 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
1172 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
1173 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
1174
1175 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
1176 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favorite
1177 combination of them (@pxref{Sample .emacs File}). By default, when
1178 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
1179 are enabled but the other two modes are disabled.
1180
1181 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
1182 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
1183 one letter for each enabled minor mode - @samp{l} for electric mode,
1184 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
1185 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
1186 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
1187 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
1188
1189 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
1190
1191 @table @asis
1192 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
1193 @kindex C-c C-l
1194 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
1195 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
1196 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
1197 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
1198
1199 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
1200 @kindex C-c C-a
1201 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
1202 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
1203 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
1204 it also enables electric minor mode.
1205
1206 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
1207 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
1208 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
1209 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
1210
1211 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
1212 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
1213 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
1214 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
1215
1216 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode})
1217 @kindex C-c C-w
1218 @findex subword-mode
1219 Toggle subword mode.
1220
1221 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
1222 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
1223 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
1224 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
1225 @end table
1226
1227 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
1228 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
1229 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
1230 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
1231 turn it (or them) off.
1232
1233
1234 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1235 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
1236 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1237 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
1238 @cindex electric characters
1239 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1240
1241 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior - as well as
1242 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
1243 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
1244 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
1245 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
1246
1247 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling
1248 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
1249
1250 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
1251 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
1252 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
1253 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
1254 does by default).
1255
1256 These keys and keywords are:
1257 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
1258 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
1259 @c fixed in the code sometime.
1260
1261 @table @kbd
1262 @item #
1263 @kindex #
1264 @findex c-electric-pound
1265 @findex electric-pound (c-)
1266 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
1267 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
1268 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
1269 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
1270 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
1271 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
1272 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
1273 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
1274 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
1275
1276 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
1277 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
1278 character.
1279 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
1280 @c reindentation.
1281
1282 @item *
1283 @kindex *
1284 @itemx /
1285 @kindex /
1286 @findex c-electric-star
1287 @findex electric-star (c-)
1288 @findex c-electric-slash
1289 @findex electric-slash (c-)
1290 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1291 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1292 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1293 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1294 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e. there's only
1295 whitespace before it).
1296
1297 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
1298 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
1299 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
1300 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1301
1302 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
1303 electric.
1304
1305 @item <
1306 @kindex <
1307 @itemx >
1308 @kindex >
1309 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
1310 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
1311 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
1312 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
1313 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
1314 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
1315 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
1316 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
1317 electric.
1318
1319 @item (
1320 @kindex (
1321 @itemx )
1322 @kindex )
1323 @findex c-electric-paren
1324 @findex electric-paren (c-)
1325 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
1326 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
1327 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
1328 automatically.
1329
1330 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
1331 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
1332 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
1333 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
1334 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1335
1336 @item @{
1337 @kindex @{
1338 @itemx @}
1339 @kindex @}
1340 @findex c-electric-brace
1341 @findex electric-brace (c-)
1342 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
1343 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1344 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1345 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
1346 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
1347 @xref{Clean-ups}.
1348
1349 @item :
1350 @kindex :
1351 @findex c-electric-colon
1352 @findex electric-colon (c-)
1353 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
1354 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1355 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
1356 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
1357 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
1358 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1359
1360 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
1361 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
1362 @xref{Other Commands}.
1363
1364 @item ;
1365 @kindex ;
1366 @itemx ,
1367 @kindex ,
1368 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
1369 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
1370 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
1371 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
1372 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1373 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
1374 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
1375 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1376
1377 @end table
1378
1379 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
1380 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
1381
1382 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
1383 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
1384 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
1385 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
1386 @code{finally} (only in Java).
1387
1388 An example:
1389
1390 @example
1391 @group
1392 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1393 if (a[i])
1394 res += a[i]->offset;
1395 else
1396 @end group
1397 @end example
1398
1399 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
1400 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
1401 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
1402 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
1403 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
1404
1405 @vindex abbrev-mode
1406 @findex abbrev-mode
1407 @cindex Abbrev mode
1408 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,, @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
1409 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
1410 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
1411 @end deffn
1412
1413
1414 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1415 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
1416 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1417 @section Auto-newline Insertion
1418 @cindex auto-newline
1419 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1420
1421 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
1422 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
1423 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
1424 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
1425 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
1426
1427 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1428
1429 @itemize @bullet
1430 @item
1431 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1432 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g. @samp{C/a} or
1433 @samp{C/la}).
1434
1435 @item
1436 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
1437 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
1438
1439 @item
1440 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
1441 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
1442
1443 @item
1444 @cindex literal
1445 @cindex syntactic whitespace
1446 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
1447 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
1448 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1449 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1450
1451 @item
1452 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e. it was typed as
1453 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1454 @end itemize
1455
1456 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
1457 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
1458 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
1459 won't have to bother.
1460
1461 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
1462 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
1463 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
1464 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
1465 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
1466 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
1467 clean-ups listed by key.
1468
1469
1470 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1471 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
1472 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1473 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
1474 @cindex hungry-deletion
1475 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1476
1477 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
1478 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
1479 either before point or after point in a single operation.
1480 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
1481 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
1482 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
1483 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
1484 @kbd{C-j}.
1485
1486 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
1487 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
1488 your editing modes!
1489
1490 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
1491 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
1492 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
1493
1494 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
1495
1496 @table @asis
1497 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
1498 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
1499 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
1500 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
1501 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
1502 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
1503 deletion.
1504
1505 @table @asis
1506 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
1507 @kindex DEL
1508 @findex c-electric-backspace
1509 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
1510 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
1511 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
1512 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
1513 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
1514 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
1515 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
1516 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
1517
1518 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
1519 @vindex c-backspace-function
1520 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
1521 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
1522 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
1523 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
1524 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
1525 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
1526 deletes a single character.
1527
1528 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
1529 @kindex C-d
1530 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
1531 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
1532 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
1533 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
1534 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
1535 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
1536 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
1537 argument.)
1538
1539 @item @code{c-delete-function}
1540 @vindex c-delete-function
1541 @vindex delete-function (c-)
1542 @findex delete-char
1543 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
1544 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
1545 default value is @code{delete-char}.
1546 @end table
1547
1548 @item Using Distinct Bindings
1549 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
1550 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
1551 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
1552 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
1553
1554 @table @asis
1555 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
1556 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
1557 @kindex C-c <backspace>
1558 @kindex C-c C-DEL
1559 @kindex C-c DEL
1560 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
1561 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
1562 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
1563 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1564 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
1565 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
1566 a character terminal.
1567
1568 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
1569 @kindex C-c C-d
1570 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
1571 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
1572 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
1573 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
1574 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
1575 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1576 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
1577 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
1578 @end table
1579 @end table
1580
1581 @kindex <delete>
1582 @kindex <backspace>
1583
1584 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
1585 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
1586 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
1587 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
1588
1589 @findex c-electric-delete
1590 @findex electric-delete (c-)
1591 @findex c-hungry-delete
1592 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
1593 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
1594 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
1595 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
1596 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
1597 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
1598 XEmacs variable.
1599 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
1600 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
1601 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
1602 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
1603 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
1604 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
1605 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
1606
1607 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
1608
1609 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
1610 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
1611 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
1612 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
1613 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
1614 its extended bindings accordingly.
1615
1616 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
1617 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
1618 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
1619 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
1620 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
1621
1622 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
1623 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
1624 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
1625 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1626
1627
1628 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1629 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
1630 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1631 @section Subword Movement and Editing
1632 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1633
1634 @cindex nomenclature
1635 @cindex subword
1636 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1637 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g. @samp{GtkWidget},
1638 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1639 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1640 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
1641 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
1642
1643 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
1644 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1645 @iftex
1646 @item @b{Nomenclature}
1647 @tab @b{Subwords}
1648 @end iftex
1649 @ifnottex
1650 @item Nomenclature
1651 @tab Subwords
1652 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
1653 @end ifnottex
1654 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
1655 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
1656 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
1657 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
1658 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
1659 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
1660 @end multitable
1661
1662 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
1663 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
1664 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
1665
1666 @findex c-forward-subword
1667 @findex forward-subword (c-)
1668 @findex c-backward-subword
1669 @findex backward-subword (c-)
1670 @findex c-mark-subword
1671 @findex mark-subword (c-)
1672 @findex c-kill-subword
1673 @findex kill-subword (c-)
1674 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
1675 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
1676 @findex c-transpose-subwords
1677 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
1678 @findex c-capitalize-subword
1679 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
1680 @findex c-upcase-subword
1681 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
1682 @findex c-downcase-subword
1683 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
1684 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
1685 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1686 @iftex
1687 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
1688 @end iftex
1689 @ifnottex
1690 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
1691 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1692 @end ifnottex
1693 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
1694 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
1695 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
1696 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
1697 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
1698 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
1699 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
1700 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
1701 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
1702 @end multitable
1703
1704 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
1705 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
1706 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
1707 commands.
1708
1709 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
1710 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
1711 @file{.emacs}:
1712
1713 @example
1714 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
1715 (lambda () (subword-mode 1)))
1716 @end example
1717
1718 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
1719 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}.
1720
1721 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1722 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
1723 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1724 @section Other Commands
1725 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1726
1727 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
1728
1729 @table @asis
1730 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
1731 @kindex C-c .
1732 @findex c-set-style
1733 @findex set-style (c-)
1734 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
1735
1736 @example
1737 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
1738 @end example
1739
1740 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
1741 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
1742 ones you define yourself.
1743
1744 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
1745 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
1746 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
1747
1748 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
1749 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
1750 @kindex C-c :
1751 @findex c-scope-operator
1752 @findex scope-operator (c-)
1753 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
1754 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
1755 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
1756
1757 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
1758 @kindex C-c C-\
1759 @findex c-backslash-region
1760 @findex backslash-region (c-)
1761 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
1762 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
1763
1764 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
1765 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
1766 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
1767 deletes any backslashes.
1768
1769 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
1770 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
1771 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
1772
1773 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
1774 @end table
1775
1776 @noindent
1777 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
1778 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
1779 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
1780 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
1781 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
1782 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
1783 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
1784 with the trailing backslashes.
1785
1786 @table @asis
1787 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
1788 @kindex C-c C-e
1789 @findex c-macro-expand
1790 @findex macro-expand (c-)
1791 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
1792 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
1793 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
1794 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
1795 with the expansion.
1796
1797 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
1798 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
1799
1800 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
1801 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
1802 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
1803 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
1804 @end table
1805
1806 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1807 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
1808 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1809 @chapter Font Locking
1810 @cindex font locking
1811 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1812
1813 @cindex Font Lock mode
1814
1815 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
1816 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
1817 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
1818 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
1819 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
1820 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1821 @ccmode{} buffers.
1822
1823 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1824 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1825 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK. The other
1826 sections apply to the other languages.
1827
1828 @menu
1829 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
1830 * Faces::
1831 * Doc Comments::
1832 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
1833 @end menu
1834
1835
1836 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1837 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
1838 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1839 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
1840 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1841
1842 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
1843 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
1844 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
1845 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
1846 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
1847 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
1848 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
1849 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
1850
1851 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
1852 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1853 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
1854 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
1855 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1856 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1857 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1858 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1859 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
1860 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
1861
1862 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
1863
1864 The decoration levels are used as follows:
1865
1866 @enumerate
1867 @comment 1
1868 @item
1869 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
1870 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
1871
1872 @comment 2
1873 @item
1874 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
1875 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
1876 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
1877 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
1878 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
1879 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
1880
1881 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
1882 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
1883
1884 @comment 3
1885 @item
1886 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
1887 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
1888 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
1889 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
1890 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
1891 that are uncertain.
1892
1893 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
1894 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
1895
1896 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
1897 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
1898 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
1899 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
1900 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
1901 @end enumerate
1902
1903 @cindex user defined types
1904 @cindex types, user defined
1905
1906 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
1907 additional regexps to match those you use:
1908
1909 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
1910 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
1911 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
1912 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
1913 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
1914 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
1915 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1916 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1917 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1918 e.g. @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1919 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1920 single identifier.
1921
1922 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
1923 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
1924 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
1925 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
1926 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
1927
1928 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
1929 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
1930 recognize types.
1931 @end defopt
1932
1933
1934 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1935 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
1936 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1937 @section Faces
1938 @cindex faces
1939 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1940
1941 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
1942 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
1943 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
1944 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
1945 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
1946
1947 @itemize @bullet
1948 @item
1949 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1950 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
1951
1952 @item
1953 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
1954 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
1955 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1956 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
1957 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
1958 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
1959 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
1960
1961 @item
1962 @vindex font-lock-string-face
1963 String and character literals are fontified in
1964 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
1965
1966 @item
1967 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
1968 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
1969
1970 @item
1971 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
1972 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
1973 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
1974 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
1975
1976 @item
1977 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
1978 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
1979 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
1980 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
1981
1982 @item
1983 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1984 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1985 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
1986 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
1987 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
1988 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
1989 them somewhere.
1990
1991 @item
1992 @vindex font-lock-type-face
1993 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
1994 defined) and classes in type contexts.
1995
1996 @item
1997 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1998 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1999 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
2000 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
2001
2002 @item
2003 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
2004 labels.
2005
2006 @item
2007 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
2008 labels.
2009
2010 @item
2011 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
2012 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2013 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
2014 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2015 exists (i.e. XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2016 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2017
2018 @item
2019 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
2020 @vindex c-invalid-face
2021 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
2022 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
2023 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
2024 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
2025 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
2026 default.
2027
2028 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
2029 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2030 @end itemize
2031
2032
2033 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2034 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
2035 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2036 @section Documentation Comments
2037 @cindex documentation comments
2038 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2039
2040 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2041 specially structured comments, e.g. the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2042 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2043 the special markup inside them.
2044
2045 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
2046 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2047 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2048 style to recognize, e.g. @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2049
2050 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2051 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
2052 conflict).
2053
2054 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
2055 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
2056 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
2057 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol `other' is looked up
2058 and its value is used instead.
2059
2060 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2061 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
2062
2063 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2064 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2065 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2066 in some other way, e.g. interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2067 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2068 reinitialize.
2069
2070 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
2071 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
2072 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
2073 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
2074 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
2075 afterwards to redo that work.
2076 @end defopt
2077
2078 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
2079 styles:
2080
2081 @table @code
2082 @item javadoc
2083 @cindex Javadoc markup
2084 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
2085
2086 @item autodoc
2087 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
2088 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
2089
2090 @item gtkdoc
2091 @cindex GtkDoc markup
2092 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
2093 @end table
2094
2095 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
2096 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
2097 Bug Reports}).
2098
2099 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
2100 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
2101 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
2102 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
2103 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
2104 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
2105 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
2106
2107 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
2108 contributing it - send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
2109
2110
2111 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2112 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
2113 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2114 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
2115 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2116
2117 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
2118 other programming mode. @xref{Faces For Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
2119 Lisp Reference Manual}.
2120
2121 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
2122 AWK mode:
2123
2124 @table @asis
2125 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
2126 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
2127 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
2128 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
2129 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
2130
2131 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
2132 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
2133 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
2134 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
2135
2136 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
2137 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
2138 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
2139 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
2140
2141 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
2142 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
2143 constructs:
2144
2145 @itemize @bullet
2146 @item
2147 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
2148 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
2149 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
2150 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
2151 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
2152
2153 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
2154 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
2155 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
2156 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
2157
2158 @item
2159 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
2160 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
2161 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
2162 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
2163 identifier precedes a parenthesized expression. Unfortunately.
2164
2165 @item
2166 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
2167 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
2168 @end itemize
2169 @end table
2170
2171
2172 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2173 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
2174 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2175 @chapter Configuration Basics
2176 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2177
2178 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
2179 @cindex Configuration
2180 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
2181 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
2182 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
2183 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
2184 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
2185 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
2186 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
2187 throughout the rest of the manual.
2188
2189 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
2190 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
2191 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
2192 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
2193 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
2194 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
2195
2196 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
2197 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
2198 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
2199 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
2200
2201 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
2202 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
2203 @itemize @asis
2204 @item
2205 @table @asis
2206 @item Style
2207 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.}
2208 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
2209 @itemx Hook
2210 @itemx File Local Variable setting
2211 @end table
2212 @end itemize
2213
2214 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
2215 settings:
2216
2217 @table @asis
2218 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
2219 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
2220 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
2221 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
2222 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
2223 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
2224 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
2225 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
2226 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
2227
2228 @example
2229 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
2230 @end example
2231
2232 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
2233 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
2234 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
2235 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
2236 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
2237 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
2238 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
2239 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
2240 the customizations.
2241
2242 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
2243 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
2244 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
2245
2246 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
2247 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
2248 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
2249 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
2250 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
2251
2252 @item Hooks
2253 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
2254 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
2255 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
2256 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports - any
2257 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
2258 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
2259 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
2260 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
2261 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
2262 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
2263
2264 @example
2265 @group
2266 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2267 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
2268 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2269
2270 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
2271 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
2272 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
2273 @end group
2274 @end example
2275
2276 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
2277
2278 @item Styles
2279 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
2280 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
2281 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
2282 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
2283 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
2284 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
2285 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
2286 in your @file{.emacs} file:
2287
2288 @example
2289 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
2290 (awk-mode . "awk")
2291 (other . "free-group-style")))
2292 @end example
2293
2294 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
2295 to create them.
2296
2297 @item File Local Variable setting
2298 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an
2299 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list},
2300 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File
2301 Variables,,, @emacsman{}}).
2302
2303 @item File Styles
2304 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
2305 described above, which applies to an individual source file.
2306 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables
2307 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File Variables,,,
2308 @emacsman{}}).
2309
2310 @item Hooks with Styles
2311 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
2312 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
2313 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
2314 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
2315 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
2316
2317 @example
2318 @group
2319 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2320 (c-set-style
2321 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
2322 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
2323 "linux"
2324 "free-group-style")))
2325 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2326 @end group
2327 @end example
2328
2329 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
2330 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
2331 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
2332 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2333 @file{.emacs}:
2334
2335 @example
2336 @group
2337 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
2338 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
2339 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
2340 @end group
2341 @end example
2342 @end table
2343
2344 @menu
2345 * CC Hooks::
2346 * Style Variables::
2347 * Styles::
2348 @end menu
2349
2350 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2351 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
2352 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2353 @section Hooks
2354 @cindex mode hooks
2355 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2356 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2357 @c some older versions of Info, e.g. the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2358 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2359 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2360 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
2361 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
2362 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
2363
2364 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
2365 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
2366 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
2367 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
2368 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
2369 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
2370 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
2371 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
2372 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
2373 standard Emacs conventions.
2374
2375 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
2376 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
2377 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
2378 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
2379 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
2380
2381 @defvar c-initialization-hook
2382 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
2383 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
2384 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
2385 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
2386 @end defvar
2387
2388 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
2389 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
2390 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
2391 language specific hook.
2392 @end defvar
2393
2394 @defvar c-mode-hook
2395 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
2396 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
2397 @defvarx java-mode-hook
2398 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
2399 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
2400 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
2401 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
2402 last thing when you enter that language mode.
2403 @end defvar
2404
2405 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
2406 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
2407 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
2408 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
2409
2410 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
2411 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
2412 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
2413 @xref{Sample .emacs File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
2414 file.
2415
2416 @example
2417 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
2418 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
2419 (no-case-fold-search)
2420 )
2421 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
2422 @end example
2423
2424 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2425 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
2426 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2427 @section Style Variables
2428 @cindex styles
2429 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2430
2431 @cindex style variables
2432 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2433 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2434 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2435 values at any time (e.g. in a hook function). The style system can
2436 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2437
2438 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
2439
2440 @itemize @bullet
2441 @item
2442 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
2443 can instead be made global by setting
2444 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
2445 initialized.
2446
2447 @item
2448 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
2449 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
2450 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
2451 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
2452 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
2453 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
2454 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
2455 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
2456 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
2457 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
2458 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
2459 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
2460 behavior, you can set the variable
2461 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
2462 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
2463 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
2464 Basics}).
2465
2466 @item
2467 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
2468 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
2469 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
2470 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
2471 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
2472 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
2473 @code{c-set-offset}(@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
2474 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
2475 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
2476 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
2477
2478 @item
2479 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
2480 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
2481 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
2482 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
2483 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
2484 or a list of functions.
2485
2486 @item
2487 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
2488 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
2489 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
2490 @end itemize
2491
2492 The style variables are:@*
2493 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
2494 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
2495 Commands});@*
2496 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
2497 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
2498 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
2499 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
2500 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
2501 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
2502 Commas});@*
2503 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
2504 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
2505 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
2506 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
2507 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
2508 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
2509 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
2510 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
2511
2512 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2513 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
2514 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2515 @section Styles
2516 @cindex styles
2517 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2518
2519 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
2520 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
2521 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
2522 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
2523
2524 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
2525 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
2526 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
2527 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
2528 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
2529 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
2530 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
2531 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
2532 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
2533 existing code using these styles.
2534
2535 As an alternative to writing a style definition yourself, you can have
2536 @ccmode{} @dfn{guess} (at least part of) your style by looking at an
2537 already formatted piece of your code, @ref{Guessing the Style}.
2538
2539 @menu
2540 * Built-in Styles::
2541 * Choosing a Style::
2542 * Adding Styles::
2543 * Guessing the Style::
2544 * File Styles::
2545 @end menu
2546
2547 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2548 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
2549 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2550 @subsection Built-in Styles
2551 @cindex styles, built-in
2552 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2553
2554 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
2555 what you're looking for. These are:
2556
2557 @table @code
2558 @item gnu
2559 @cindex GNU style
2560 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
2561 for C code in GNU programs.
2562
2563 @item k&r
2564 @cindex K&R style
2565 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
2566
2567 @item bsd
2568 @cindex BSD style
2569 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
2570
2571 @item whitesmith
2572 @cindex Whitesmith style
2573 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
2574 commercial C compiler.
2575
2576 @item stroustrup
2577 @cindex Stroustrup style
2578 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
2579
2580 @item ellemtel
2581 @cindex Ellemtel style
2582 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
2583 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
2584 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
2585 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
2586 places.}.
2587 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
2588
2589 @item linux
2590 @cindex Linux style
2591 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
2592
2593 @item python
2594 @cindex Python style
2595 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
2596 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
2597 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
2598
2599 @item java
2600 @cindex Java style
2601 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
2602 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2603 @code{java-mode}.
2604
2605 @item awk
2606 @cindex AWK style
2607 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
2608 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2609 @code{awk-mode}.
2610
2611 @item user
2612 @cindex User style
2613 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
2614 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
2615 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
2616 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
2617 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
2618 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
2619 afterwards.
2620 @end table
2621
2622
2623 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2624 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
2625 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2626 @subsection Choosing a Style
2627 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2628
2629 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
2630 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
2631 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
2632
2633 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
2634 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
2635 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
2636 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
2637
2638 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
2639 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
2640 list, @ref{File Styles}.
2641
2642 @defopt c-default-style
2643 @vindex default-style (c-)
2644 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
2645 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
2646 of major mode symbols to style names:
2647
2648 @enumerate
2649 @item
2650 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
2651 name. This style is then used for all modes.
2652
2653 @item
2654 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
2655 is looked up to find a style name string.
2656
2657 @item
2658 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
2659 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
2660 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
2661
2662 @item
2663 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
2664 @end enumerate
2665
2666 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
2667 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
2668 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
2669 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
2670
2671 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
2672 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
2673 @end defopt
2674
2675 @defvar c-indentation-style
2676 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
2677 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
2678 string.
2679 @end defvar
2680
2681 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2682 @node Adding Styles, Guessing the Style, Choosing a Style, Styles
2683 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2684 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
2685 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2686
2687 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
2688 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
2689 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
2690 following format - the list can then be passed as an argument to the
2691 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
2692 definition in @ref{Sample .emacs File}.
2693
2694 @cindex style definition
2695 @c @defvr {List} style definition
2696 @table @asis
2697 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
2698 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
2699
2700 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
2701 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
2702 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
2703 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
2704 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
2705 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
2706 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
2707 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
2708
2709 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
2710 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
2711 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
2712 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
2713 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
2714 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
2715 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
2716 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
2717 system.
2718 @c @end defvr
2719
2720 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
2721
2722 @table @code
2723 @item c-offsets-alist
2724 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
2725
2726 @example
2727 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
2728 @end example
2729
2730 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
2731 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
2732 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
2733
2734 @item c-special-indent-hook
2735 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
2736 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
2737 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
2738 @end table
2739 @end table
2740
2741 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
2742 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
2743 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
2744
2745 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
2746 @findex add-style (c-)
2747 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
2748 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
2749 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
2750 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
2751 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
2752 Otherwise, a new style is added.
2753
2754 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
2755 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
2756 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
2757 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
2758
2759 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
2760 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
2761 @end defun
2762
2763 @defvar c-style-alist
2764 @vindex style-alist (c-)
2765 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
2766 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
2767 @end defvar
2768
2769 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2770 @node Guessing the Style, File Styles, Adding Styles, Styles
2771 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2772 @subsection Guessing the Style
2773 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2774
2775 Instead of specifying a style, you can get @ccmode{} to @dfn{guess}
2776 your style by examining an already formatted code buffer. @ccmode{}
2777 then determines the ''most frequent'' offset (@pxref{c-offsets-alist})
2778 for each of the syntactic symbols (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})
2779 encountered in the buffer, and the ''most frequent'' value of
2780 c-basic-offset (@pxref{Customizing Indentation}), then merges the
2781 current style with these ''guesses'' to form a new style. This
2782 combined style is known as the @dfn{guessed style}.
2783
2784 To do this, call @code{c-guess} (or one of the other 5 guessing
2785 commands) on your sample buffer. The analysis of your code may take
2786 some time.
2787
2788 You can then set the guessed style in any @ccmode{} buffer with
2789 @code{c-guess-install}. You can display the style with
2790 @code{c-guess-view}, and preserve it by copying it into your
2791 @file{.emacs} for future use, preferably after editing it.
2792
2793 @table @asis
2794 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-no-install}
2795 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer-no-install}
2796 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region-no-install}
2797 @findex c-guess-no-install
2798 @findex c-guess-buffer-no-install
2799 @findex c-guess-region-no-install
2800 @findex guess-no-install (c-)
2801 @findex guess-buffer-no-install (c-)
2802 @findex guess-region-no-install (c-)
2803 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer and guess the
2804 style from it.
2805
2806 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2807 (@code{c-guess-region-no-install}), the entire buffer
2808 (@code{c-guess-buffer-no-install}), or the first
2809 @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess-no-install}).
2810
2811 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2812 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2813 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2814 @end table
2815
2816 @table @asis
2817 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess}
2818 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer}
2819 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region}
2820 @findex c-guess
2821 @findex c-guess-buffer
2822 @findex c-guess-region
2823 @findex guess (c-)
2824 @findex guess-buffer (c-)
2825 @findex guess-region (c-)
2826 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer, guess the style
2827 from it, then install the guessed style on the buffer. The guessed
2828 style is given a name based on the buffer's absolute file name, and
2829 you can then set this style on any @ccmode{} buffer with @kbd{C-c .}.
2830
2831 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2832 (@code{c-guess-region}), the entire buffer (@code{c-guess-buffer}), or
2833 the first @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess}).
2834
2835 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2836 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2837 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2838 @end table
2839
2840 @defopt c-guess-region-max
2841 @vindex guess-region-max (c-)
2842 This variable, default 50000, is the size in bytes of the buffer
2843 portion examined by c-guess and c-guess-no-install. If set to
2844 @code{nil}, the entire buffer is examined.
2845 @end defopt
2846
2847 @defopt c-guess-offset-threshold
2848 @vindex guess-offset-threshold (c-)
2849 This variable, default 10, is the maximum offset, either outwards or
2850 inwards, which will be taken into account by the analysis process.
2851 Any offset bigger than this will be ignored. For no limit, set this
2852 variable to a large number.
2853 @end defopt
2854
2855 @table @asis
2856 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-install}
2857 @findex c-guess-install
2858 @findex guess-install (c-)
2859
2860 Set the current buffer's style to the guessed style. This prompts you
2861 to enter an optional new style name to give to the guessed style. By
2862 default, this name is based on the buffer's absolute file name. You
2863 can then use this style like any other.
2864
2865 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-view}
2866 @findex c-guess-view
2867 @findex guess-view (c-)
2868 Display the most recently guessed style in a temporary buffer. This
2869 display is in the form of a @code{c-add-style} form (@pxref{Adding
2870 Styles}) which can be easily copied to your @file{.emacs}. You will
2871 probably want to edit it first.
2872
2873 The display of the guessed style contains these elements:
2874
2875 @table @asis
2876 @item Placeholder Name
2877 You should replace this with a style name of your own.
2878 @item Parent Style
2879 The style current when the guessing began, from which the guessed
2880 style inherits (@pxref{Config Basics}) the settings which weren't
2881 guessed.
2882 @item Guessed Offsets
2883 These are the core result of the guessing process. Each of them is
2884 marked by a comment.
2885 @item Inherited Offsets
2886 These are syntactic offsets which have been taken over from the parent
2887 style. To avoid possible future conflicts, you should remove either
2888 these offsets or the parent style name.
2889 @end table
2890 @end table
2891
2892 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2893 @node File Styles, , Guessing the Style, Styles
2894 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2895 @subsection File Styles
2896 @cindex styles, file local
2897 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2898
2899 @cindex file local variables
2900
2901 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
2902 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
2903 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files, @emacsman{},
2904 @emacsmantitle{}}).
2905
2906 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
2907 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
2908 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
2909 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
2910 on a per-file basis:
2911
2912 @defvar c-file-style
2913 @vindex file-style (c-)
2914 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
2915 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
2916 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
2917 @end defvar
2918
2919 @defvar c-file-offsets
2920 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
2921 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
2922 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
2923 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2924 using @code{c-set-offset}.
2925 @end defvar
2926
2927 Note that file style settings (i.e. @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2928 before file offset settings
2929 (i.e. @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2930 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2931 made local to that buffer, even if
2932 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
2933 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
2934 notice this effect.}.
2935
2936 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that
2937 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your
2938 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable
2939 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or
2940 @code{c-file-offsets}.
2941 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2942 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
2943 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2944 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
2945 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2946
2947 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
2948 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
2949 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
2950 relevant variables as necessary.
2951
2952 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
2953 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2954 @cindex comment line prefix
2955 @vindex comment-start
2956 @vindex comment-end
2957 @vindex comment-start-skip
2958 @vindex paragraph-start
2959 @vindex paragraph-separate
2960 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
2961 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
2962 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
2963 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
2964 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
2965 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
2966 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
2967 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
2968 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
2969 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
2970 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
2971 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
2972
2973 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
2974 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2975 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
2976 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
2977 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
2978 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
2979 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
2980 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
2981 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
2982
2983 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
2984 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start
2985 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
2986 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
2987
2988 @example
2989 // blah blah
2990 @end example
2991
2992 @noindent
2993 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
2994 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
2995
2996 @example
2997 @group
2998 /*
2999 * blah blah
3000 */
3001 @end group
3002 @end example
3003
3004 @noindent
3005 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
3006 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
3007 (i.e. @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
3008 block comments.
3009
3010 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
3011 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
3012 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
3013 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
3014 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
3015 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
3016 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
3017 variables. That's also the case if you modify
3018 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
3019 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
3020 @end defopt
3021
3022 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
3023 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3024
3025 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
3026 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
3027 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3028 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3029 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3030 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g. in the
3031 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3032 margins of the texts kept intact:
3033
3034 @example
3035 @group
3036 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
3037 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
3038 * Knuth,
3039 *
3040 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
3041 * proved it correct, not tried it.
3042 */
3043 @end group
3044 @end example
3045
3046 @findex c-setup-filladapt
3047 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
3048 @findex filladapt-mode
3049 @vindex filladapt-mode
3050 @cindex Filladapt mode
3051 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
3052 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
3053 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
3054 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
3055 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
3056 by default). A patch for that is available from
3057 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
3058 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3059 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3060 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3061 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g. with
3062 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3063
3064 @example
3065 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
3066 (c-setup-filladapt)
3067 (filladapt-mode 1))
3068 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
3069 @end example
3070
3071 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
3072 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
3073 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
3074 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
3075 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
3076 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
3077 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
3078 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
3079 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
3080 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
3081 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
3082 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3083 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
3084 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3085 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3086 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3087 e.g. @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3088
3089 @example
3090 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
3091 @end example
3092
3093 @noindent
3094 break into
3095
3096 @example
3097 @group
3098 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
3099 * is a Bad Thing. */
3100 @end group
3101 @end example
3102
3103 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
3104 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
3105 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
3106 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
3107 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
3108 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3109 @end defopt
3110
3111 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3112 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3113 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3114 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g. to never
3115 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3116 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3117 never should occur:
3118
3119 @table @code
3120 @item string
3121 Inside a string or character literal.
3122 @item c
3123 Inside a C style block comment.
3124 @item c++
3125 Inside a C++ style line comment.
3126 @item cpp
3127 Inside a preprocessor directive.
3128 @item code
3129 Anywhere else, i.e. in normal code.
3130 @end table
3131
3132 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
3133 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
3134 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
3135 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
3136 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
3137 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
3138 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
3139 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
3140 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
3141 results in the current implementation.
3142 @end defopt
3143
3144 @vindex comment-multi-line
3145 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto Fill,,,
3146 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the indentation and
3147 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
3148 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
3149 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
3150 comments.
3151
3152 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3153 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3154 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3155 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3156 (e.g. @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3157 inconsistent behavior.
3158
3159 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3160 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
3161 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3162 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
3163 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3164
3165 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
3166 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
3167
3168 @table @asis
3169 @item Braces and Colons
3170 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
3171 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
3172 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines - this is any
3173 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
3174 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
3175 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
3176 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
3177
3178 @item Semicolons and Commas
3179 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
3180 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
3181 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
3182 @end table
3183
3184 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
3185 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
3186 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
3187 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
3188 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
3189
3190 @example
3191 @group
3192 while (i < MAX) @{
3193 total += entry[i];
3194 entry [i++] = 0;
3195 @}
3196 @end group
3197 @end example
3198
3199 @noindent
3200 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
3201 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
3202 brace.
3203
3204 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
3205 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
3206 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
3207
3208 @menu
3209 * Hanging Braces::
3210 * Hanging Colons::
3211 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
3212 @end menu
3213
3214
3215 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3216 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
3217 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3218 @section Hanging Braces
3219 @cindex hanging braces
3220 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3221
3222 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
3223 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
3224 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
3225 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
3226 in @ref{Style Variables}.
3227
3228 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
3229 @samp{@{}:
3230
3231 @example
3232 if (foo < 17) @{
3233 @end example
3234
3235 @noindent
3236 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
3237 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
3238 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
3239 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
3240 something like:
3241
3242 @example
3243 ((substatement-open 1061))
3244 @end example
3245
3246 @noindent
3247 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
3248 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
3249
3250 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
3251 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
3252
3253 @example
3254 (brace-entry-open)
3255 @end example
3256
3257 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
3258 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
3259 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
3260 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
3261 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
3262
3263 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
3264 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3265
3266 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
3267 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
3268 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
3269 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
3270 or a function.
3271
3272 @table @asis
3273 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol
3274 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
3275 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
3276 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
3277 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3278 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
3279 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
3280 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
3281 ignored.
3282
3283 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
3284 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
3285 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
3286 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
3287 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
3288 normal indentation analysis.}.
3289
3290 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
3291 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
3292 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
3293 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
3294 these constructs.
3295
3296 @item The associated value - the ``ACTION'' list or function
3297 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
3298 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
3299 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
3300 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
3301
3302 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
3303 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
3304 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
3305 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
3306 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
3307 of the line, as in:
3308
3309 @example
3310 // here, open braces always `hang'
3311 void spam( int i ) @{
3312 if( i == 7 ) @{
3313 dosomething(i);
3314 @}
3315 @}
3316 @end example
3317
3318 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
3319 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
3320 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
3321 are added neither before nor after the brace.
3322 @end table
3323
3324 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
3325 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
3326 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
3327 that braces by default end up on their own line.
3328
3329 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
3330
3331 @example
3332 ((brace-list-open)
3333 (brace-entry-open)
3334 (statement-cont)
3335 (substatement-open after)
3336 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
3337 (extern-lang-open after)
3338 (namespace-open after)
3339 (module-open after)
3340 (composition-open after)
3341 (inexpr-class-open after)
3342 (inexpr-class-close before))
3343 @end example
3344
3345 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
3346 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
3347 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
3348 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
3349 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
3350 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
3351 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
3352 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
3353 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
3354 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
3355 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
3356 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
3357 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
3358 themselves.
3359 @end defopt
3360
3361 @menu
3362 * Custom Braces::
3363 @end menu
3364
3365 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3366 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
3367 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3368 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
3369 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3370
3371 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
3372 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3373 @cindex action functions
3374 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
3375 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
3376 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
3377 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
3378 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
3379 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3380 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
3381 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
3382
3383 @cindex customization, brace hanging
3384 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3385 for the brace (e.g. @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3386 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3387 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g. by using
3388 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3389 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3390 of them (i.e. @code{nil}).
3391
3392 @defvar c-syntactic-context
3393 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
3394 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
3395 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
3396 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
3397 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
3398 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
3399
3400 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
3401 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
3402 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
3403 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
3404 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3405 @end defvar
3406
3407 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
3408 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
3409 constructs:
3410
3411 @example
3412 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
3413 @{
3414 int i=0;
3415 do @{
3416 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
3417 i++;
3418 @} while( i < count );
3419 @}
3420 @end example
3421
3422 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
3423 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
3424 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
3425 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
3426 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
3427 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
3428 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
3429
3430 @example
3431 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
3432 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
3433 (save-excursion
3434 (let (langelem)
3435 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
3436 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
3437 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
3438 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
3439 (forward-sexp -1))
3440 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
3441 '(before)
3442 '(before after)))))
3443 @end example
3444
3445 @findex c-snug-do-while
3446 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
3447 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
3448 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
3449 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
3450 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
3451 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
3452
3453 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3454 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
3455 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3456 @section Hanging Colons
3457 @cindex hanging colons
3458 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3459
3460 @cindex customization, colon hanging
3461 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
3462 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3463
3464 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
3465 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
3466 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} - When a colon is typed, @ccmode
3467 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
3468 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
3469 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
3470 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
3471 newly typed colon.
3472
3473 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
3474 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3475
3476 @table @asis
3477 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol
3478 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
3479 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
3480 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
3481 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
3482
3483 @item The associate value - the ``ACTION'' list
3484 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
3485 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
3486 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
3487 supported - there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
3488 @end table
3489 @end defopt
3490
3491 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
3492 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
3493 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
3494 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
3495
3496 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3497 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
3498 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3499 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
3500 @cindex hanging semicolons
3501 @cindex hanging commas
3502 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
3503 @cindex customization, comma newlines
3504 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3505
3506 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
3507 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
3508 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
3509 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
3510 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
3511 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
3512 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
3513 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
3514 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
3515 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
3516 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
3517 They should return one of the following values:
3518
3519 @table @code
3520 @item t
3521 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
3522 more functions from the list are to be called.
3523 @item stop
3524 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
3525 be inserted.
3526 @item nil
3527 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
3528 to be called.
3529 @end table
3530
3531 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
3532 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
3533 determination being made, then no newline is added.
3534
3535 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
3536 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
3537 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
3538 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
3539 @end defopt
3540
3541 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
3542 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
3543 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
3544 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
3545 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
3546 use, add this function to the front of the
3547 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
3548
3549 @example
3550 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
3551 (save-excursion
3552 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
3553 (zerop (forward-line 1))
3554 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
3555 'stop
3556 nil)))
3557 @end example
3558 @end defun
3559
3560 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
3561 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
3562 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
3563 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
3564 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
3565 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
3566 statements. In addition to
3567 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
3568 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3569 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3570 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3571 (e.g. in C++ or Java).
3572 @end defun
3573
3574
3575 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3576 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
3577 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3578 @chapter Clean-ups
3579 @cindex clean-ups
3580 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3581
3582 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3583 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3584 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3585 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g. like this:
3586
3587 @example
3588 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
3589 @end example
3590
3591 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3592 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3593 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e. to adjust
3594 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3595
3596 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
3597 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
3598 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
3599 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
3600 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
3601 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
3602
3603 @defopt c-cleanup-list
3604 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
3605 @cindex literal
3606
3607 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
3608 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
3609 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
3610 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
3611 @end defopt
3612
3613 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
3614 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
3615
3616 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
3617 @c bit too much in dvi output.
3618 @table @code
3619 @item brace-else-brace
3620 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
3621 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
3622 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
3623
3624 @example
3625 @group
3626 void spam(int i)
3627 @{
3628 if( i==7 ) @{
3629 dosomething();
3630 @}
3631 else
3632 @{
3633 @end group
3634 @end example
3635
3636 @noindent
3637 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
3638
3639 @example
3640 @group
3641 void spam(int i)
3642 @{
3643 if( i==7 ) @{
3644 dosomething();
3645 @} else @{
3646 @end group
3647 @end example
3648
3649 @item brace-elseif-brace
3650 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
3651 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
3652
3653 @example
3654 @group
3655 void spam(int i)
3656 @{
3657 if( i==7 ) @{
3658 dosomething();
3659 @}
3660 else if( i==3 )
3661 @{
3662 @end group
3663 @end example
3664
3665 @noindent
3666 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
3667
3668 @example
3669 @group
3670 void spam(int i)
3671 @{
3672 if( i==7 ) @{
3673 dosomething();
3674 @} else if(
3675 @end group
3676 @end example
3677
3678 @noindent
3679 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
3680
3681 @example
3682 @group
3683 void spam(int i)
3684 @{
3685 if( i==7 ) @{
3686 dosomething();
3687 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
3688 @end group
3689 @end example
3690
3691 @item brace-catch-brace
3692 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
3693 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
3694
3695 @item empty-defun-braces
3696 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
3697 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
3698 Thus the following:
3699
3700 @example
3701 @group
3702 class Spam
3703 @{
3704 @}
3705 @end group
3706 @end example
3707
3708 @noindent
3709 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
3710
3711 @example
3712 @group
3713 class Spam
3714 @{@}
3715 @end group
3716 @end example
3717
3718 @item defun-close-semi
3719 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
3720 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
3721 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
3722
3723 @example
3724 @group
3725 class Spam
3726 @{
3727 ...
3728 @}
3729 ;
3730 @end group
3731 @end example
3732
3733 @noindent
3734 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
3735
3736 @example
3737 @group
3738 class Spam
3739 @{
3740 ...
3741 @};
3742 @end group
3743 @end example
3744
3745 @item list-close-comma
3746 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
3747 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
3748 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
3749 @code{defun-close-semi}.
3750
3751 @item scope-operator
3752 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
3753 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
3754 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
3755 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
3756 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
3757 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
3758 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
3759
3760 @item one-liner-defun
3761 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
3762 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
3763 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
3764 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
3765 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
3766
3767 For example, consider this AWK code:
3768
3769 @example
3770 @group
3771 BEGIN @{
3772 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
3773 @}
3774 @end group
3775 @end example
3776
3777 @noindent
3778 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
3779
3780 @example
3781 @group
3782 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
3783 @end group
3784 @end example
3785
3786 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
3787 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
3788 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
3789 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
3790 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
3791 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
3792 applies.
3793 @end defopt
3794 @end table
3795
3796 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
3797 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
3798 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3799
3800 @table @code
3801 @item space-before-funcall
3802 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3803 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3804 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g. @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3805 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3806 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3807 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
3808 functions.
3809
3810 @item compact-empty-funcall
3811 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3812 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3813 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3814 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3815 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e. you will get @samp{signal
3816 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3817 closing parenthesis is typed.
3818
3819 @item comment-close-slash
3820 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3821 at the beginning of a line (i.e. immediately after the comment prefix).
3822 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3823 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3824 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
3825 @end table
3826
3827
3828 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3829 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
3830 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3831 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
3832 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3833
3834 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
3835 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
3836 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
3837 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
3838
3839 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
3840 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
3841 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
3842
3843 @enumerate
3844 @item
3845 @cindex syntactic symbol
3846 @cindex anchor position
3847 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
3848 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
3849 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
3850 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
3851 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
3852 Analysis}.
3853 @item
3854 @cindex offsets
3855 @cindex indentation offset specifications
3856 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
3857 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
3858 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
3859 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
3860 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
3861 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
3862 @end enumerate
3863
3864 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
3865 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
3866 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
3867 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
3868
3869 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
3870 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
3871 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
3872 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
3873 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
3874 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
3875 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
3876 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
3877 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
3878 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
3879 @end defopt
3880
3881 @menu
3882 * Syntactic Analysis::
3883 * Syntactic Symbols::
3884 * Indentation Calculation::
3885 @end menu
3886
3887
3888 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3889 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
3890 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3891 @section Syntactic Analysis
3892 @cindex syntactic analysis
3893 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3894
3895 @cindex syntactic element
3896 @cindex syntactic context
3897 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
3898 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the
3899 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic
3900 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
3901 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
3902 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
3903 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
3904 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
3905 brief and typical example:
3906
3907 @example
3908 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
3909 @end example
3910
3911 @cindex syntactic symbol
3912 @noindent
3913 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3914 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3915 recognized, e.g. @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3916 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3917 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3918 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
3919 with the recognized construct - there might be zero or more.
3920
3921 @cindex anchor position
3922 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
3923 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
3924 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
3925 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
3926 the syntactic element list then it's either nil or that anchor position.
3927
3928 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
3929 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
3930 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
3931
3932 @example
3933 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
3934 2: @{
3935 3: int tmp = a;
3936 4: a = b;
3937 5: b = tmp;
3938 6: @}
3939 @end example
3940
3941 @noindent
3942 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
3943 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
3944
3945 @table @asis
3946 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
3947 @kindex C-c C-s
3948 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
3949 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
3950 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
3951 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
3952 position(s).
3953 @end table
3954
3955 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3956 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e. @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3957 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3958 line.}:
3959
3960 @example
3961 ((statement 35))
3962 @end example
3963
3964 @noindent
3965 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
3966 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
3967 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
3968 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
3969
3970 @example
3971 ((defun-block-intro 29))
3972 @end example
3973
3974 @noindent
3975 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
3976 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
3977 which is the brace just after the function header.
3978
3979 Here's another example:
3980
3981 @example
3982 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
3983 2: @{
3984 3: if( doit )
3985 4: @{
3986 5: return( val + incr );
3987 6: @}
3988 7: return( val );
3989 8: @}
3990 @end example
3991
3992 @noindent
3993 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
3994
3995 @example
3996 ((substatement-open 46))
3997 @end example
3998
3999 @cindex substatement
4000 @cindex substatement block
4001 @noindent
4002 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
4003 block. @footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
4004 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
4005 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
4006 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
4007
4008 @cindex comment-only line
4009 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
4010 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
4011 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
4012
4013 @example
4014 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
4015 2: @{
4016 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
4017 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
4018 5: @{
4019 6: drawables[i].draw();
4020 7: @}
4021 8: @}
4022 @end example
4023
4024 @noindent
4025 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
4026
4027 @example
4028 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
4029 @end example
4030
4031 @noindent
4032 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
4033 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
4034 anchor position.
4035
4036
4037 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4038 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
4039 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4040 @section Syntactic Symbols
4041 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4042
4043 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
4044 @vindex c-offsets-alist
4045 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
4046 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
4047 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
4048 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
4049 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
4050 them.
4051
4052 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
4053 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
4054 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
4055 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
4056 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
4057 line---this highlights the anchor position.
4058
4059 @ssindex -open symbols
4060 @ssindex -close symbols
4061 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
4062 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
4063 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
4064 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
4065 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
4066 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
4067
4068 @ssindex -intro symbols
4069 @ssindex -cont symbols
4070 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
4071 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
4072 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
4073 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
4074 respectively.
4075
4076 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
4077 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
4078 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
4079
4080 @table @code
4081 @item string
4082 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4083 @item c
4084 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4085 @item defun-open
4086 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4087 Symbols}.
4088 @item defun-close
4089 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4090 Symbols}.
4091 @item defun-block-intro
4092 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4093 @item class-open
4094 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4095 @item class-close
4096 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4097 @item inline-open
4098 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4099 @item inline-close
4100 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4101 @item func-decl-cont
4102 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
4103 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
4104 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
4105 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
4106 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
4107 @c go somewhere better?}
4108 @item knr-argdecl-intro
4109 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4110 @item knr-argdecl
4111 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4112 @item topmost-intro
4113 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4114 @item topmost-intro-cont
4115 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
4116 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
4117 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4118 @item annotation-top-cont
4119 Topmost definition continuation lines where all previous items are
4120 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4121 @item member-init-intro
4122 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4123 @item member-init-cont
4124 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4125 @item inher-intro
4126 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4127 @item inher-cont
4128 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4129 @item block-open
4130 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4131 @item block-close
4132 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4133 @item brace-list-open
4134 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4135 @item brace-list-close
4136 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4137 @item brace-list-intro
4138 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4139 @item brace-list-entry
4140 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
4141 Symbols}.
4142 @item brace-entry-open
4143 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
4144 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4145 @item statement
4146 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4147 @item statement-cont
4148 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4149 @item annotation-var-cont
4150 A continuation of a statement where all previous items are
4151 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4152 @item statement-block-intro
4153 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4154 Symbols}.
4155 @item statement-case-intro
4156 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4157 @item statement-case-open
4158 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
4159 Statement Symbols}.
4160 @item substatement
4161 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
4162 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4163 @item substatement-open
4164 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4165 Symbols}.
4166 @item substatement-label
4167 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
4168 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4169 @item case-label
4170 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4171 @item access-label
4172 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4173 @item label
4174 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4175 @item do-while-closure
4176 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
4177 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4178 @item else-clause
4179 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
4180 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4181 @item catch-clause
4182 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
4183 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
4184 Symbols}.
4185 @item comment-intro
4186 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4187 @item arglist-intro
4188 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4189 @item arglist-cont
4190 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
4191 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4192 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
4193 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
4194 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4195 @item arglist-close
4196 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4197 @item stream-op
4198 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
4199 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
4200 @item inclass
4201 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4202 @item cpp-macro
4203 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4204 @item cpp-define-intro
4205 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
4206 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
4207 Symbols}.
4208 @item cpp-macro-cont
4209 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
4210 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
4211 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
4212 @item friend
4213 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4214 @item objc-method-intro
4215 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4216 Method Symbols}.
4217 @item objc-method-args-cont
4218 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4219 Method Symbols}.
4220 @item objc-method-call-cont
4221 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4222 Symbols}.
4223 @item extern-lang-open
4224 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g. @code{extern "C"
4225 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4226 @item extern-lang-close
4227 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
4228 Symbols}.
4229 @item inextern-lang
4230 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
4231 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4232 @item namespace-open
4233 @itemx namespace-close
4234 @itemx innamespace
4235 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
4236 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4237 @item module-open
4238 @itemx module-close
4239 @itemx inmodule
4240 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
4241 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4242 @item composition-open
4243 @itemx composition-close
4244 @itemx incomposition
4245 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4246 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4247 @item template-args-cont
4248 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4249 @item inlambda
4250 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4251 (i.e. anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4252 Block Symbols}.
4253 @item lambda-intro-cont
4254 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e. between the
4255 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4256 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4257 @item inexpr-statement
4258 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
4259 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
4260 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
4261 Symbols}.
4262 @item inexpr-class
4263 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
4264 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
4265 Java. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4266 @end table
4267
4268 @menu
4269 * Function Symbols::
4270 * Class Symbols::
4271 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
4272 * Switch Statement Symbols::
4273 * Brace List Symbols::
4274 * External Scope Symbols::
4275 * Paren List Symbols::
4276 * Literal Symbols::
4277 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
4278 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
4279 * Java Symbols::
4280 * Statement Block Symbols::
4281 * K&R Symbols::
4282 @end menu
4283
4284 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4285 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4286 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4287 @subsection Function Symbols
4288 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4289
4290 This example shows a typical function declaration.
4291
4292 @example
4293 1: void
4294 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
4295 3: @{
4296 4: int tmp = a;
4297 5: a = b;
4298 6: b = tmp;
4299 7: int ignored =
4300 8: a + b;
4301 9: @}
4302 @end example
4303
4304 @ssindex topmost-intro
4305 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
4306 @ssindex defun-open
4307 @ssindex defun-close
4308 @ssindex defun-block-intro
4309 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
4310 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
4311 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4312 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
4313 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4314 corresponding
4315 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4316 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e. it is
4317 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4318 top-level function definition.
4319
4320 @ssindex statement
4321 @ssindex statement-cont
4322 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
4323 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
4324 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
4325 on the previous line.
4326
4327 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4328 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4329 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4330 @subsection Class related Symbols
4331 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4332
4333 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
4334
4335 @example
4336 1: class Bass
4337 2: : public Guitar,
4338 3: public Amplifiable
4339 4: @{
4340 5: public:
4341 6: Bass()
4342 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4343 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4344 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4345 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4346 11: @{
4347 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
4348 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
4349 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
4350 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
4351 16: @}
4352 17: friend class Luthier;
4353 18: @};
4354 @end example
4355
4356 @ssindex class-open
4357 @ssindex class-close
4358 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
4359 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
4360 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
4361 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4362 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4363 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4364 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4365 for C and Objective-C. For consistency, structs in all supported
4366 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4367 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4368 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
4369
4370 @ssindex inher-intro
4371 @ssindex inher-cont
4372 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
4373 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
4374 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
4375
4376 @ssindex access-label
4377 @ssindex inclass
4378 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
4379
4380 @example
4381 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
4382 @end example
4383
4384 @noindent
4385 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
4386 this is a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
4387 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
4388 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
4389 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
4390 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
4391 syntax:
4392
4393 @example
4394 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
4395 @end example
4396
4397 @ssindex member-init-intro
4398 @ssindex member-init-cont
4399 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
4400 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
4401 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
4402 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
4403 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
4404 list started on line 7.
4405
4406 @cindex in-class inline methods
4407 @ssindex inline-open
4408 @ssindex inline-close
4409 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
4410
4411 @example
4412 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
4413 @end example
4414
4415 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
4416 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
4417 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
4418 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
4419 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
4420 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
4421 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
4422 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
4423 before the method name, as in:
4424
4425 @example
4426 1: class Bass
4427 2: : public Guitar,
4428 3: public Amplifiable
4429 4: @{
4430 5: public:
4431 6: Bass();
4432 7: @};
4433 8:
4434 9: inline
4435 10: Bass::Bass()
4436 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4437 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4438 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4439 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4440 15: @{
4441 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
4442 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
4443 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
4444 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
4445 20: @}
4446 @end example
4447
4448 @ssindex friend
4449 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
4450 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
4451 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
4452 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
4453 elements:
4454
4455 @example
4456 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
4457 @end example
4458
4459 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
4460 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
4461
4462 @ssindex template-args-cont
4463 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
4464
4465 @example
4466 1: ThingManager <int,
4467 2: Framework::Callback *,
4468 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
4469 @end example
4470
4471 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
4472 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
4473
4474 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4475 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4476 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4477 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
4478 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4479
4480 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
4481 assigned to various conditional constructs:
4482
4483 @example
4484 1: void spam( int index )
4485 2: @{
4486 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
4487 4: @{
4488 5: if( i == 10 )
4489 6: do_something_special();
4490 7: else
4491 8: silly_label:
4492 9: do_something( i );
4493 10: @}
4494 11: do @{
4495 12: another_thing( i-- );
4496 13: @}
4497 14: while( i > 0 );
4498 15: @}
4499 @end example
4500
4501 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
4502
4503 @ssindex substatement-open
4504 @ssindex statement-block-intro
4505 @ssindex block-close
4506 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
4507 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
4508 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
4509 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
4510 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
4511 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
4512 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
4513 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
4514
4515 @ssindex substatement
4516 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
4517 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
4518 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
4519
4520 @ssindex substatement-label
4521 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
4522 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
4523 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
4524 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
4525
4526 @ssindex else-clause
4527 @ssindex catch-clause
4528 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
4529 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
4530 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
4531 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
4532 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
4533 @code{catch-clause}.
4534
4535 @ssindex do-while-closure
4536 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
4537 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
4538 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
4539 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
4540 @code{block-close} syntax.
4541
4542 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4543 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4544 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4545 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
4546 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4547
4548 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
4549 example:
4550
4551 @example
4552 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
4553 2: @{
4554 3: switch( i ) @{
4555 4: case Ham:
4556 5: be_a_pig();
4557 6: break;
4558 7: case Salt:
4559 8: drink_some_water();
4560 9: break;
4561 10: default:
4562 11: @{
4563 12: what_is_it();
4564 13: break;
4565 14: @}
4566 15: @}
4567 14: @}
4568 @end example
4569
4570 @ssindex case-label
4571 @ssindex statement-case-intro
4572 @ssindex statement-case-open
4573 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
4574 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
4575 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
4576 block --- it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
4577
4578 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4579 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4580 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4581 @subsection Brace List Symbols
4582 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4583
4584 @cindex brace lists
4585 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
4586 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
4587 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
4588 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
4589 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
4590 brace lists too. An example:
4591
4592 @example
4593 1: static char* ingredients[] =
4594 2: @{
4595 3: "Ham",
4596 4: "Salt",
4597 5: NULL
4598 6: @};
4599 @end example
4600
4601 @ssindex brace-list-open
4602 @ssindex brace-list-intro
4603 @ssindex brace-list-close
4604 @ssindex brace-list-entry
4605 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
4606 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
4607 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
4608 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
4609 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
4610 initializer list.
4611
4612 @ssindex brace-entry-open
4613 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
4614 example:
4615
4616 @example
4617 1: struct intpairs[] =
4618 2: @{
4619 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
4620 4: @{
4621 5: 3,
4622 6: 4
4623 7: @}
4624 8: @{ 1,
4625 9: 2 @},
4626 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
4627 11: @};
4628 @end example
4629
4630 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
4631 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
4632 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
4633 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
4634 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
4635 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
4636 line 10.
4637
4638 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4639 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4640 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4641 @subsection External Scope Symbols
4642 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4643
4644 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
4645 symbols. In this example:
4646
4647 @example
4648 1: extern "C"
4649 2: @{
4650 3: int thing_one( int );
4651 4: int thing_two( double );
4652 5: @}
4653 @end example
4654
4655 @ssindex extern-lang-open
4656 @ssindex extern-lang-close
4657 @ssindex inextern-lang
4658 @ssindex inclass
4659 @noindent
4660 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
4661 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
4662
4663 @example
4664 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
4665 @end example
4666
4667 @noindent
4668 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4669 @code{inclass}.
4670
4671 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4672 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4673 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g. C++ namespace blocks get
4674 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4675 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4676
4677 @table @asis
4678 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
4679 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
4680 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
4681 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
4682
4683 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
4684 @ssindex namespace-open
4685 @ssindex namespace-close
4686 @ssindex innamespace
4687 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
4688
4689 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
4690 @ssindex module-open
4691 @ssindex module-close
4692 @ssindex inmodule
4693 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
4694
4695 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
4696 @ssindex composition-open
4697 @ssindex composition-close
4698 @ssindex incomposition
4699 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
4700 @end table
4701
4702 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4703 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4704 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4705 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
4706 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4707
4708 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
4709 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
4710 calls. This example illustrates these:
4711
4712 @example
4713 1: void a_function( int line1,
4714 2: int line2 );
4715 3:
4716 4: void a_longer_function(
4717 5: int line1,
4718 6: int line2
4719 7: );
4720 8:
4721 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
4722 10: @{
4723 11: a_function(
4724 12: line1,
4725 13: line2
4726 14: );
4727 15:
4728 16: a_longer_function( line1,
4729 17: line2 );
4730 18: @}
4731 @end example
4732
4733 @ssindex arglist-intro
4734 @ssindex arglist-close
4735 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
4736 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
4737 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
4738 that closes the argument list.
4739
4740 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
4741 @ssindex arglist-cont
4742 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
4743 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
4744 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
4745 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
4746 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
4747 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
4748 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
4749 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
4750
4751 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
4752 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
4753 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
4754 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
4755 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
4756 Functions}).
4757
4758 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
4759 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
4760 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
4761
4762 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4763 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4764 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4765 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
4766 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4767
4768 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
4769 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
4770
4771 @example
4772 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
4773 2: const
4774 3: @{
4775 4: /* this line starts a multiline
4776 5: * comment. This line should get `c' syntax */
4777 6:
4778 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
4779 8: string. This line should get `string' syntax.";
4780 9:
4781 10: note:
4782 11: @{
4783 12: #ifdef LOCK
4784 13: Lock acquire();
4785 14: #endif // LOCK
4786 15: slap_pop();
4787 16: cout << "I played "
4788 17: << "a note\n";
4789 18: @}
4790 19: @}
4791 @end example
4792
4793 The lines to note in this example include:
4794
4795 @itemize @bullet
4796 @item
4797 @ssindex func-decl-cont
4798 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
4799
4800 @item
4801 @ssindex comment-intro
4802 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
4803 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
4804 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point --- It is always accompanied
4805 by another syntactic element which does have one.
4806
4807 @item
4808 @ssindex c
4809 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
4810
4811 @item
4812 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4813 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
4814 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
4815 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
4816 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
4817 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
4818 code.
4819
4820 @item
4821 @ssindex string
4822 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
4823
4824 @item
4825 @ssindex label
4826 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
4827
4828 @item
4829 @ssindex block-open
4830 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
4831 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
4832 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
4833 does have one.
4834
4835 @item
4836 @ssindex cpp-macro
4837 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
4838 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
4839 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
4840 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
4841 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
4842 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
4843 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
4844 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
4845
4846 @item
4847 @ssindex stream-op
4848 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4849 @end itemize
4850
4851 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4852 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4853 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4854 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
4855 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4856
4857 @cindex multiline macros
4858 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4859 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
4860 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4861 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4862 other code, i.e. the lines inside them are indented according to the
4863 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4864 line inside a macro definition (i.e. the line after the starting line of
4865 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4866
4867 @example
4868 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
4869 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
4870 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
4871 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
4872 5: else
4873 @end example
4874
4875 @noindent
4876 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4877 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4878 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4879 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4880 code, i.e. @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4881 on line 5.
4882
4883 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
4884 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
4885 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
4886 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
4887 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
4888 macros.}.
4889
4890 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
4891
4892 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4893 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Java Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4894 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4895 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
4896 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4897
4898 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
4899 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
4900 illustrating these:
4901
4902 @example
4903 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
4904 2: withStuff:stuff
4905 3: @{
4906 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
4907 5: toDelegate:anObject
4908 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
4909 7: @}
4910 @end example
4911
4912 @ssindex objc-method-intro
4913 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
4914 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
4915 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
4916 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
4917 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
4918
4919 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4920 @node Java Symbols, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4921 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4922 @subsection Java Symbols
4923 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4924
4925 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
4926 this:
4927
4928 @example
4929 1: @@Test
4930 2: public void watch(Observable o) @{
4931 3: @@NonNull
4932 4: Observer obs = new Observer() @{
4933 5: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
4934 6: history.addElement(arg);
4935 7: @}
4936 8: @};
4937 9: o.addObserver(obs);
4938 10: @}
4939 @end example
4940
4941 @ssindex inexpr-class
4942 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
4943 Lines 5 and 8 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
4944 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
4945 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
4946 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
4947 have an anchor position.
4948
4949 @ssindex annotation-top-cont
4950 @ssindex annotation-var-cont
4951 Line 2 is assigned the @code{annotation-top-cont} syntax, due to it being a
4952 continuation of a topmost introduction with an annotation symbol preceding
4953 the current line. Similarly, line 4 is assigned the @code{annotation-var-cont}
4954 syntax due to it being a continuation of a variable declaration where preceding
4955 the declaration is an annotation.
4956
4957 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4958 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Java Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4959 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4960 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
4961 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4962
4963 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
4964 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
4965 this, e.g:
4966
4967 @example
4968 1: int res = (@{
4969 2: int y = foo (); int z;
4970 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
4971 4: z;
4972 5: @});
4973 @end example
4974
4975 @ssindex inexpr-statement
4976 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
4977 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
4978 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
4979 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
4980 contain an anchor position.
4981
4982 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
4983 statements, as illustrated here:
4984
4985 @example
4986 1: array itgob()
4987 2: @{
4988 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
4989 4: lambda
4990 5: (mixed arg)
4991 6: @{
4992 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
4993 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
4994 9: return catch @{
4995 10: write (s + "\n");
4996 11: @};
4997 12: @}
4998 @end example
4999
5000 @ssindex inlambda
5001 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
5002 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
5003 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
5004 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
5005 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
5006 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
5007 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
5008 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
5009 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
5010 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
5011 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
5012 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
5013
5014 @ssindex inexpr-statement
5015 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
5016 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
5017 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
5018 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
5019 handled like this too.
5020
5021 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5022 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
5023 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5024 @subsection K&R Symbols
5025 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5026
5027 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5028 @ssindex knr-argdecl
5029 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5030 code @footnote{a.k.a. K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5031
5032 @example
5033 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
5034 2: int a;
5035 3: int b;
5036 4: int c;
5037 5: @{
5038 6: return a + b + c;
5039 7: @}
5040 @end example
5041
5042 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5043 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5044 (i.e. lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5045 syntax.
5046
5047
5048 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5049 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
5050 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5051 @section Indentation Calculation
5052 @cindex indentation
5053 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5054
5055 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
5056 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
5057
5058 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
5059 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
5060 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
5061 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
5062
5063 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
5064 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
5065 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
5066 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
5067 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
5068 column.
5069
5070 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
5071 our first example again:
5072
5073 @example
5074 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
5075 2: @{
5076 3: int tmp = a;
5077 4: a = b;
5078 5: b = tmp;
5079 6: @}
5080 @end example
5081
5082 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
5083 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
5084
5085 @example
5086 ((defun-block-intro 29))
5087 @end example
5088
5089 @noindent
5090 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
5091 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
5092 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
5093
5094 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
5095 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
5096 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
5097 total indentation of 4 spaces.
5098
5099 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
5100 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
5101 line is 4 spaces.
5102
5103 Here's another example:
5104
5105 @example
5106 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5107 2: @{
5108 3: if( doit )
5109 4: @{
5110 5: return( val + incr );
5111 6: @}
5112 7: return( val );
5113 8: @}
5114 @end example
5115
5116 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
5117 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
5118 context. The context for this line is:
5119
5120 @example
5121 ((substatement-open 46))
5122 @end example
5123
5124 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
5125 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
5126 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
5127 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
5128 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
5129 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
5130
5131 Simple, huh?
5132
5133 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
5134 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
5135 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
5136
5137 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
5138 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
5139 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
5140
5141 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
5142 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
5143 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
5144 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
5145
5146
5147 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5148 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
5149 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5150 @chapter Customizing Indentation
5151 @cindex customization, indentation
5152 @cindex indentation
5153 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5154
5155 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
5156 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
5157 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
5158 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
5159 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
5160 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
5161 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
5162
5163 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
5164 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
5165 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5166
5167 @defopt c-basic-offset
5168 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
5169 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
5170 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
5171 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
5172 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
5173 @end defopt
5174
5175 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
5176 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
5177 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
5178 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
5179
5180 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
5181 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
5182 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
5183 indentation.
5184
5185 @menu
5186 * c-offsets-alist::
5187 * Interactive Customization::
5188 * Line-Up Functions::
5189 * Custom Line-Up::
5190 * Other Indentation::
5191 @end menu
5192
5193
5194 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5195 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
5196 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5197 @section c-offsets-alist
5198 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5199
5200 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
5201 variable @code{c-offset-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
5202 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
5203 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
5204
5205 @defopt c-offsets-alist
5206 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
5207 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
5208 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
5209 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
5210 Analysis}.
5211
5212 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
5213 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
5214 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
5215 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
5216
5217 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
5218 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
5219 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
5220 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
5221 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
5222
5223 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
5224 of these kinds of offsets:
5225
5226 @example
5227 ((statement . 0)
5228 (substatement . +)
5229 (cpp-macro . [0])
5230 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
5231 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5232 c-indent-multi-line-block))
5233 @dots{}
5234 @*)
5235 @end example
5236 @end defopt
5237
5238 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
5239 @findex set-offset (c-)
5240 @kindex C-c C-o
5241 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
5242 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
5243 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
5244
5245 You can use @code{c-set-offsets} interactively within a @ccmode{}
5246 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
5247 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
5248 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
5249 (defaulting to the current offset).
5250
5251 @code{c-set-offsets} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
5252 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
5253 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
5254 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
5255 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
5256 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
5257 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
5258 @end deffn
5259
5260 @cindex offset specification
5261 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
5262 the following:
5263
5264 @table @asis
5265 @item An integer
5266 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
5267 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
5268 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
5269 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
5270 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
5271 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
5272 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
5273 from zero).
5274
5275 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
5276 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
5277 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5278
5279 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
5280 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
5281 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
5282 values that the special symbols correspond to:
5283
5284 @table @code
5285 @item +
5286 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
5287 @item -
5288 @code{c-basic-offset} times -1
5289 @item ++
5290 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
5291 @item --
5292 @code{c-basic-offset} times -2
5293 @item *
5294 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
5295 @item /
5296 @code{c-basic-offset} times -0.5
5297 @end table
5298
5299 @item A vector
5300 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
5301 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
5302 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
5303 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
5304 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
5305 beyond the first will be ignored.
5306
5307 @item A function or lambda expression
5308 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
5309 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
5310 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
5311 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
5312 details about them.
5313
5314 @item A symbol with a variable binding
5315 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
5316 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
5317 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
5318 vector (an absolute offset).
5319
5320 @item A list
5321 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
5322 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
5323 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
5324 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
5325 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
5326 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
5327
5328 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
5329 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
5330 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
5331
5332 @table @code
5333 @item first
5334 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
5335 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
5336 @item min
5337 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5338 absolute - they can't be mixed.
5339 @item max
5340 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5341 absolute - they can't be mixed.
5342 @item add
5343 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
5344 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
5345 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
5346 @end table
5347
5348 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
5349 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
5350 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
5351 @end table
5352
5353 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
5354 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
5355 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
5356 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
5357 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
5358 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
5359 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
5360 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
5361 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
5362
5363 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5364 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
5365 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5366 @section Interactive Customization
5367 @cindex customization, interactive
5368 @cindex interactive customization
5369 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5370
5371 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
5372 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
5373 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
5374 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
5375
5376 @example
5377 @group
5378 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5379 2: @{
5380 3: if( doit )
5381 4: @{
5382 5: return( val + incr );
5383 6: @}
5384 7: return( val );
5385 8: @}
5386 @end group
5387 @end example
5388
5389 @noindent
5390 to:
5391
5392 @example
5393 @group
5394 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5395 2: @{
5396 3: if( doit )
5397 4: @{
5398 5: return( val + incr );
5399 6: @}
5400 7: return( val );
5401 8: @}
5402 @end group
5403 @end example
5404
5405 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
5406 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
5407 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
5408 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
5409 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
5410 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
5411
5412 @example
5413 ((substatement-open 44))
5414 @end example
5415
5416 @noindent
5417 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
5418 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
5419 symbol.
5420
5421 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
5422 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
5423 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
5424 syntactic symbol we want to change!
5425
5426 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
5427 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
5428 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
5429 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
5430 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
5431
5432 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
5433 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
5434 should now look like:
5435
5436 @example
5437 @group
5438 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5439 2: @{
5440 3: if( doit )
5441 4: @{
5442 5: return( val + incr );
5443 6: @}
5444 7: return( val );
5445 8: @}
5446 @end group
5447 @end example
5448
5449 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
5450 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
5451 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
5452 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
5453 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
5454 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
5455 adjustments.
5456
5457 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
5458 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
5459 @findex set-offset (c-)
5460 @kindex C-c C-o
5461 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
5462 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
5463 the example above) and from your mode hook.
5464
5465 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
5466 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
5467 for that syntactic element.
5468 @end deffn
5469 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
5470
5471 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5472 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
5473 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5474 @section Line-Up Functions
5475 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5476
5477 @cindex line-up function
5478 @cindex indentation function
5479 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
5480 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
5481 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
5482 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
5483 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
5484
5485 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
5486 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
5487 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
5488 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
5489 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
5490 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
5491
5492 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
5493 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
5494 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
5495
5496 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
5497 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
5498 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
5499 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case - try a
5500 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
5501
5502 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
5503 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
5504 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
5505 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
5506
5507 @macro workswith
5508 @emph{Works with:@ }
5509 @end macro
5510 @ifinfo
5511 @unmacro workswith
5512 @macro workswith
5513 Works with:
5514 @end macro
5515 @end ifinfo
5516
5517 @macro sssTBasicOffset
5518 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5519 @end macro
5520
5521 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
5522 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5523 @end macro
5524
5525 @macro hereFn{func}
5526 <- @i{\func\}@c
5527 @end macro
5528
5529 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
5530 @iftex
5531 @unmacro hereFn
5532 @macro hereFn{func}
5533 <-@i{\func\}@c
5534 @end macro
5535 @end iftex
5536
5537 @menu
5538 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
5539 * List Line-Up::
5540 * Operator Line-Up::
5541 * Comment Line-Up::
5542 * Misc Line-Up::
5543 @end menu
5544
5545 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5546 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
5547 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5548 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
5549 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5550
5551 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
5552 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
5553
5554 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
5555 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
5556 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
5557 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
5558 indentation is added. E.g:
5559
5560 @example
5561 @group
5562 main (int,
5563 char **
5564 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5565 @end group
5566 @end example
5567
5568 @noindent
5569 and
5570
5571 @example
5572 @group
5573 main (
5574 int, char **
5575 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5576 @end group
5577 @end example
5578
5579 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5580 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5581 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
5582 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5583
5584 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
5585 @end defun
5586
5587 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5588
5589 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
5590 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
5591 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
5592 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
5593 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
5594 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
5595 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
5596 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
5597
5598 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5599 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5600 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
5601 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5602
5603 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
5604 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
5605 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
5606 @end defun
5607
5608 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5609
5610 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
5611 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
5612 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g:
5613
5614 @example
5615 @group
5616 if (n > 0)
5617 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5618 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5619 @end group
5620 @end example
5621
5622 @noindent
5623 and
5624
5625 @example
5626 @group
5627 if (n > 0)
5628 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5629 m+=n; n=0;
5630 @}
5631 @end group
5632 @end example
5633
5634 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5635 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
5636 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5637
5638 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5639 @code{-open} symbols.
5640 @end defun
5641
5642 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5643
5644 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
5645 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
5646 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g:
5647
5648 @example
5649 @group
5650 int *foo[] = @{
5651 NULL,
5652 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5653 @end group
5654 @end example
5655
5656 @noindent
5657 and
5658
5659 @example
5660 @group
5661 int *foo[] = @{
5662 NULL,
5663 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5664 17
5665 @},
5666 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5667 @end group
5668 @end example
5669
5670 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5671 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
5672 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5673
5674 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5675 @code{-open} symbols.
5676 @end defun
5677
5678 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5679
5680 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
5681 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
5682 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
5683 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
5684 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
5685 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g:
5686
5687 @example
5688 @group
5689 int main()
5690 @{ puts ("Hello!");
5691 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
5692 @}
5693 @end group
5694 @end example
5695
5696 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
5697 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
5698 expressions.
5699
5700 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
5701 @end defun
5702
5703 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5704
5705 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5706 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5707 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5708 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g. for Java
5709 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5710 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5711 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
5712 construct.
5713
5714 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
5715 @code{inexpr-class}.
5716 @end defun
5717
5718 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5719
5720 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
5721 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
5722 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
5723 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
5724 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
5725 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
5726
5727 @example
5728 @group
5729 int foo()
5730 @{
5731 a;
5732 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5733 @end group
5734 @end example
5735
5736 @example
5737 @group
5738 int foo()
5739 @{
5740 @{
5741 a;
5742 @}
5743 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5744 @end group
5745 @end example
5746
5747 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
5748 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
5749 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
5750 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
5751 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
5752 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
5753
5754 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
5755 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
5756 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
5757 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
5758
5759 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
5760 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
5761 @end defun
5762
5763 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5764
5765 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5766 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
5767 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
5768 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g:
5769
5770 @example
5771 @group
5772 something
5773 @{
5774 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5775 @}
5776 @end group
5777 @end example
5778
5779 @noindent
5780 and
5781
5782 @example
5783 @group
5784 something @{
5785 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5786 @}
5787 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5788 @end group
5789 @end example
5790
5791 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5792 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
5793
5794 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
5795 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5796 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5797 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5798 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g. @code{inclass}
5799 and @code{inextern-lang}.
5800 @end defun
5801
5802 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5803 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
5804 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5805 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
5806 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5807
5808 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
5809 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
5810
5811 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
5812 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
5813 contained within parentheses.
5814
5815 @defun c-lineup-arglist
5816 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
5817 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
5818
5819 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
5820 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
5821 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
5822 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g:
5823
5824 @example
5825 @group
5826 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
5827 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
5828 @});
5829 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5830 @end group
5831 @end example
5832
5833 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
5834 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
5835 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
5836 indent such cases this way.
5837
5838 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
5839 @end defun
5840
5841 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5842
5843 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
5844 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
5845 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
5846 brace block.
5847
5848 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
5849 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
5850 @code{arglist-intro}.
5851 @end defun
5852
5853 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5854
5855 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
5856 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
5857 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
5858 initializers under each other. E.g:
5859
5860 @example
5861 @group
5862 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
5863 Cyphr (a),
5864 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5865 @end group
5866 @end example
5867
5868 @noindent
5869 and
5870
5871 @example
5872 @group
5873 class Foo
5874 : public Cyphr,
5875 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5876 @end group
5877 @end example
5878
5879 @noindent
5880 and
5881
5882 @example
5883 @group
5884 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
5885 : Cyphr (a)
5886 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5887 @end group
5888 @end example
5889
5890 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
5891 @end defun
5892
5893 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5894
5895 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
5896 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
5897 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
5898 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
5899 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
5900 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
5901 E.g:
5902
5903 @example
5904 @group
5905 class Foo
5906 extends
5907 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5908 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5909 @end group
5910 @end example
5911
5912 @noindent
5913 and
5914
5915 @example
5916 @group
5917 class Foo
5918 extends Cyphr,
5919 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5920 @end group
5921 @end example
5922
5923 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
5924 @end defun
5925
5926 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5927
5928 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
5929 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
5930 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
5931 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
5932 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
5933 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
5934 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
5935 start if it doesn't hang. E.g:
5936
5937 @example
5938 @group
5939 int foo()
5940 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5941 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5942 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
5943 @end group
5944 @end example
5945
5946 @noindent
5947 and
5948
5949 @example
5950 @group
5951 int foo() throws Cyphr,
5952 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5953 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5954 @end group
5955 @end example
5956
5957 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
5958 @end defun
5959
5960 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5961
5962 @defun c-lineup-template-args
5963 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
5964 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
5965 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
5966 opening @samp{<}.
5967
5968 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
5969 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
5970
5971 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
5972 @end defun
5973
5974 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5975
5976 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
5977 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
5978 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
5979 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
5980 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
5981 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
5982 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
5983 lineup the current line with it.
5984
5985 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
5986 @end defun
5987
5988 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5989
5990 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
5991 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
5992 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
5993 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
5994
5995 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5996 @end defun
5997
5998 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5999
6000 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
6001 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
6002 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
6003 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
6004
6005 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
6006 @end defun
6007
6008 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6009 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6010 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6011 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
6012 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6013
6014 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
6015 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
6016 line.
6017
6018 @defun c-lineup-argcont
6019 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
6020 Line up a continued argument. E.g:
6021
6022 @example
6023 @group
6024 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
6025 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
6026 @end group
6027 @end example
6028
6029 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
6030 lines which are the start of an argument.
6031
6032 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument
6033 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
6034 expressions for the operands.
6035
6036 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6037 @end defun
6038
6039 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6040
6041 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
6042 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
6043 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
6044 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
6045 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
6046
6047 @example
6048 @group
6049 if ( x < 10
6050 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
6051 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
6052 )
6053 @end group
6054 @end example
6055
6056 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6057 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6058 settings, e.g. as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6059 suggestion to get a consistent style):
6060
6061 @example
6062 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
6063 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
6064 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
6065 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
6066 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
6067 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
6068 @end example
6069
6070 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6071 @end defun
6072
6073 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6074
6075 @defun c-lineup-assignments
6076 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
6077 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
6078 in the statement. If there isn't any, return nil to allow stacking with
6079 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
6080 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6081
6082 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6083 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6084
6085 @end defun
6086
6087 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6088
6089 @defun c-lineup-math
6090 @findex lineup-math (c-)
6091 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6092 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e. this
6093 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6094 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6095
6096 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6097 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6098 @end defun
6099
6100 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6101
6102 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
6103 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
6104 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
6105 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
6106 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
6107 with the first of those tokens. E.g:
6108
6109 @example
6110 @group
6111 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
6112 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
6113 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
6114 @end group
6115 @end example
6116
6117 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
6118 expressions.
6119
6120 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6121 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6122 @end defun
6123
6124 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6125
6126 @defun c-lineup-streamop
6127 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6128 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e. @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6129
6130 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
6131 @end defun
6132
6133 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6134
6135 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
6136 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
6137 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
6138 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
6139 another one. E.g:
6140
6141 @example
6142 @group
6143 result = prefix + "A message "
6144 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
6145 @end group
6146 @end example
6147
6148 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
6149 lineup functions.
6150
6151 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6152 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6153 @end defun
6154
6155
6156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6157 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6158 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6159 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
6160 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6161
6162 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
6163 of comment structure.
6164
6165 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
6166 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
6167 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
6168 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6169
6170 @example
6171 @group
6172 /* /** /*
6173 * text * text text
6174 */ */ */
6175 @end group
6176 @end example
6177
6178 @example
6179 @group
6180 /* text /* /**
6181 text ** text ** text
6182 */ */ */
6183 @end group
6184 @end example
6185
6186 @example
6187 @group
6188 /**************************************************
6189 * text
6190 *************************************************/
6191 @end group
6192 @end example
6193
6194 @vindex comment-start-skip
6195 @example
6196 @group
6197 /**************************************************
6198 Free form text comments:
6199 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
6200 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
6201 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
6202 delimiter line is whatever matches the
6203 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
6204 **************************************************/
6205 @end group
6206 @end example
6207
6208 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6209 the comment line prefix, e.g. the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6210 line inside a comment.
6211
6212 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
6213 @end defun
6214
6215 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6216
6217 @defun c-lineup-comment
6218 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
6219 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
6220 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
6221 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
6222
6223 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
6224 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
6225 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
6226 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
6227
6228 @example
6229 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
6230 @end example
6231
6232 @noindent
6233 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
6234 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
6235 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
6236 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
6237 @end defopt
6238
6239 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6240 @end defun
6241
6242 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6243
6244 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
6245 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
6246 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
6247 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
6248 block. E.g:
6249
6250 @example
6251 @group
6252 int main()
6253 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
6254 @{
6255 return 0;
6256 @}
6257 @end group
6258 @end example
6259
6260 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
6261 expressions.
6262
6263 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6264 @end defun
6265
6266 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6267 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6268 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6269 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
6270 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6271
6272 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
6273 any earlier category.
6274
6275 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
6276 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
6277 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
6278 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
6279
6280 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
6281 @end defun
6282
6283 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6284
6285 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
6286 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
6287 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
6288 construct preceding the macro. E.g:
6289
6290 @example
6291 @group
6292 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6293 \"Some text.\";
6294
6295 #define X(A, B) \
6296 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6297 printf (A, B); \
6298 @} while (0)
6299 @end group
6300 @end example
6301
6302 @noindent
6303 and:
6304
6305 @example
6306 @group
6307 int dribble() @{
6308 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6309 error(\"Not running!\");
6310
6311 #define X(A, B) \
6312 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6313 printf (A, B); \
6314 @} while (0)
6315 @end group
6316 @end example
6317
6318 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6319 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6320 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g. in the following cases,
6321 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6322 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6323 on the @samp{#define} line:
6324
6325 @example
6326 @group
6327 const char msg[] =
6328 \"Some text.\";
6329
6330 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6331 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6332 this->refs++; \
6333 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6334 @end group
6335 @end example
6336
6337 @noindent
6338 and:
6339
6340 @example
6341 @group
6342 int dribble() @{
6343 if (!running)
6344 error(\"Not running!\");
6345
6346 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6347 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6348 this->refs++; \
6349 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6350 @end group
6351 @end example
6352
6353 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
6354 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
6355 are then added to the two column indentation that
6356 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
6357
6358 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
6359 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
6360 indentation on the top level.
6361
6362 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
6363 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
6364 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
6365 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
6366 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
6367 described above.
6368
6369 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
6370 @end defun
6371
6372 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6373
6374 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
6375 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
6376 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
6377
6378 @example
6379 @group
6380 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
6381 "bar %0, %1"
6382 : "=r" (w),
6383 "=r" (x)
6384 : "0" (y),
6385 "1" (z));
6386 @end group
6387 @end example
6388
6389 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6390 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
6391
6392 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6393 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6394 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6395 arglist lineups, e.g.
6396
6397 @example
6398 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
6399 @end example
6400
6401 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6402 @end defun
6403
6404 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6405
6406 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
6407 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
6408 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
6409 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
6410 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
6411 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
6412 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
6413 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
6414 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
6415 added to the indentation. E.g:
6416
6417 @example
6418 @group
6419 int
6420 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6421 @{
6422 return -i;
6423 @}
6424 @end group
6425 @end example
6426
6427 @noindent
6428 and
6429
6430 @example
6431 @group
6432 struct
6433 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6434 @{
6435 double height;
6436 @}
6437 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6438 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6439 @sssTBasicOffset{}
6440 @end group
6441 @end example
6442
6443 @noindent
6444 and
6445
6446 @example
6447 @group
6448 struct larch
6449 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6450 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6451 @end group
6452 @end example
6453
6454 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
6455 @end defun
6456
6457 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6458 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
6459 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6460 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
6461 @cindex customization, indentation functions
6462 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6463
6464 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
6465 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
6466 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
6467 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
6468 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
6469
6470 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
6471 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
6472 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
6473 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
6474 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
6475 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
6476 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
6477 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
6478 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
6479
6480 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
6481 element (see below). The return value is a @code{c-offsets-alist}
6482 offset specification: for example, an integer, a symbol such as
6483 @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning @code{nil} is useful
6484 when the offset specification for a syntactic element is a list
6485 containing the line-up function (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even
6486 another line-up function. Full details of these are in
6487 @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
6488
6489 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6490 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6491 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e. setting text properties for caching
6492 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6493
6494 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
6495 a cons cell of the form
6496
6497 @example
6498 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
6499 @end example
6500
6501 @noindent
6502 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
6503 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
6504 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
6505 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
6506 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
6507 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
6508 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
6509 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
6510 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
6511 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
6512 your setup for this by using the access functions
6513 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.) described below.
6514
6515 @vindex c-syntactic-element
6516 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6517 @vindex c-syntactic-context
6518 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6519 Some syntactic symbols, e.g. @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6520 info in the syntactic element - typically other positions that can be
6521 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6522 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
6523 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
6524 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
6525 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful - it gets
6526 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
6527 Braces}.
6528
6529 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
6530 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
6531 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
6532 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
6533 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
6534
6535 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
6536 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
6537 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
6538 @end defun
6539
6540 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
6541 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
6542 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or nil if there is none.
6543 @end defun
6544
6545 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
6546 @findex langelem-col (c-)
6547 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
6548 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
6549 non-@code{nil}.
6550 @end defun
6551
6552 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
6553 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
6554 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
6555 is none.
6556
6557 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
6558 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
6559 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
6560 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
6561 @end defun
6562
6563 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
6564 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
6565 custom line-up function associated with it.
6566
6567 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6568 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
6569 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6570 @section Other Special Indentations
6571 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6572
6573 To configure macros which you invoke without a terminating @samp{;},
6574 see @xref{Macros with ;}.
6575
6576 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
6577
6578 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
6579 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
6580 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
6581 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
6582 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
6583
6584 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
6585 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
6586 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
6587 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
6588 work.
6589 @end defopt
6590
6591 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
6592 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
6593 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
6594 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
6595 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
6596 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
6597 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
6598 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
6599 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
6600 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
6601 Line-Up}).
6602
6603 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6604 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6605 (i.e. what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6606 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6607 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e. you'll probably
6608 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6609 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6610 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
6611 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
6612
6613 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
6614 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
6615 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
6616 @end defopt
6617
6618
6619 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6620 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
6621 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6622 @chapter Customizing Macros
6623 @cindex macros
6624 @cindex preprocessor directives
6625 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6626
6627 Preprocessor macros in C, C++, and Objective C (introduced by
6628 @code{#define}) have a syntax different from the main language---for
6629 example, a macro declaration is not terminated by a semicolon, and if
6630 it is more than a line long, line breaks in it must be escaped with
6631 backslashes. @ccmode{} has some commands to manipulate these, see
6632 @ref{Macro Backslashes}.
6633
6634 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
6635 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior
6636 by setting the following user option:
6637
6638 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
6639 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
6640 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
6641 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
6642 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
6643 @end defopt
6644
6645 Because a macro can expand into anything at all, near where one is
6646 invoked @ccmode{} can only indent and fontify code heuristically.
6647 Sometimes it gets it wrong. Usually you should try to design your
6648 macros so that they ''look like ordinary code'' when you invoke them.
6649 However, one situation is so common that @ccmode{} handles it
6650 specially: that is when certain macros needn't (or mustn't) be
6651 followed by a @samp{;}. You need to configure @ccmode{} to handle
6652 these macros properly, see @ref{Macros with ;}.
6653
6654 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6655 @menu
6656 * Macro Backslashes::
6657 * Macros with ;::
6658 @end menu
6659
6660 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6661 @node Macro Backslashes, Macros with ;, Custom Macros, Custom Macros
6662 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6663 @section Customizing Macro Backslashes
6664 @cindex #define
6665 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6666
6667 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
6668 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
6669 customized with these variables:
6670
6671 @defopt c-backslash-column
6672 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
6673 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
6674 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
6675 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6676 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6677 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6678 e.g. @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6679
6680 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6681 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6682 next tab stop (i.e. next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6683 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6684 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6685 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
6686 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
6687 long ``stick out'' instead.
6688
6689 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
6690 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6691 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
6692 @end defopt
6693
6694 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
6695 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6696 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6697 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6698 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g. by
6699 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6700 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6701
6702 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
6703 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
6704 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
6705 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
6706 @end defopt
6707
6708 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6709 @node Macros with ;, , Macro Backslashes, Custom Macros
6710 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6711 @section Macros with semicolons
6712 @cindex macros with semicolons
6713 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6714 Macros which needn't (or mustn't) be followed by a semicolon when you
6715 invoke them, @dfn{macros with semicolons}, are very common. These can
6716 cause @ccmode{} to parse the next line wrongly as a
6717 @code{statement-cont} (@pxref{Function Symbols}) and thus mis-indent
6718 it.
6719
6720 You can prevent this by specifying which macros have semicolons. It
6721 doesn't matter whether or not such a macro has a parameter list:
6722
6723 @defopt c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6724 @vindex macro-names-with-semicolon (c-)
6725 This buffer-local variable specifies which macros have semicolons.
6726 After setting its value, you need to call
6727 @code{c-make-macro-with-semi-re} for it to take effect. It should be
6728 set to one of these values:
6729
6730 @table @asis
6731 @item nil
6732 There are no macros with semicolons.
6733 @item a list of strings
6734 Each string is the name of a macro with a semicolon. Only valid
6735 @code{#define} names are allowed here. For example, to set the
6736 default value, you could write the following into your @file{.emacs}:
6737
6738 @example
6739 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6740 '("Q_OBJECT" "Q_PROPERTY" "Q_DECLARE" "Q_ENUMS"))
6741 @end example
6742
6743 @item a regular expression
6744 This matches each symbol which is a macro with a semicolon. It must
6745 not match any string which isn't a valid @code{#define} name. For
6746 example:
6747
6748 @example
6749 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6750 "\\<\\(CLEAN_UP_AND_RETURN\\|Q_[[:upper:]]+\\)\\>")
6751 @end example
6752 @end table
6753 @end defopt
6754
6755 @defun c-make-macro-with-semi-re
6756 @findex make-macro-with-semi-re (c-)
6757 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6758 each time you change the value of
6759 @code{c-macro-names-with-semicolon}. It takes no arguments, and its
6760 return value has no meaning. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s
6761 initialization code.
6762 @end defun
6763
6764 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6765 @node Odds and Ends, Sample .emacs File, Custom Macros, Top
6766 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6767 @chapter Odds and Ends
6768 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6769
6770 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
6771
6772 @defopt c-require-final-newline
6773 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
6774 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
6775 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
6776 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
6777 Buffers,,, @lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
6778 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
6779 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
6780
6781 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
6782 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
6783 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
6784 @end defopt
6785
6786 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
6787 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
6788 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
6789 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
6790 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
6791 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
6792 want.
6793 @end defopt
6794
6795 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
6796 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
6797 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
6798 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
6799 is no corresponding @code{if}.
6800
6801 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
6802 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
6803 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
6804 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
6805 @end defopt
6806
6807
6808 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6809 @node Sample .emacs File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
6810 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6811 @appendix Sample .emacs File
6812 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6813
6814 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
6815 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
6816 to change some of the actual values.
6817
6818 @verbatim
6819 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
6820 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
6821 ;; inherit from it.
6822 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
6823 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
6824 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
6825
6826 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
6827 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
6828 ;; made by a style.
6829 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
6830
6831 ;; Create my personal style.
6832 (defconst my-c-style
6833 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
6834 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
6835 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
6836 (brace-list-open)))
6837 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
6838 (inher-intro)
6839 (case-label after)
6840 (label after)
6841 (access-label after)))
6842 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
6843 empty-defun-braces
6844 defun-close-semi))
6845 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
6846 (substatement-open . 0)
6847 (case-label . 4)
6848 (block-open . 0)
6849 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
6850 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
6851 "My C Programming Style")
6852 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
6853
6854 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
6855 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
6856 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
6857 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
6858 ;; other customizations
6859 (setq tab-width 8
6860 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
6861 indent-tabs-mode nil)
6862 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
6863 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
6864 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
6865 @end verbatim
6866
6867 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6868 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample .emacs File, Top
6869 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6870 @chapter Performance Issues
6871 @cindex performance
6872 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6873
6874 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
6875
6876 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
6877 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
6878 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
6879 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6880 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6881 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6882
6883 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e. take
6884 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6885 I.e. it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6886 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6887 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6888 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
6889 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
6890 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
6891 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
6892
6893 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
6894 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
6895 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
6896 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
6897 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
6898 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
6899 gets.
6900
6901 @findex beginning-of-defun
6902 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6903 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g. a function in C,
6904 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6905 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6906 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
6907 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
6908 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
6909 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
6910
6911 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
6912 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
6913 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
6914 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
6915 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
6916 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
6917 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
6918 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
6919 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
6920 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
6921 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
6922 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
6923 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
6924 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
6925 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
6926 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
6927
6928 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
6929 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
6930 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
6931 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
6932 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
6933 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
6934 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
6935 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
6936 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
6937
6938 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
6939 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
6940 XEmacs users can set the variable
6941 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
6942 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
6943 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
6944 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
6945 styles where these braces are hung (e.g. most JDK-derived Java styles),
6946 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
6947 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
6948 Emacs' recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
6949 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
6950 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
6951 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
6952 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
6953 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
6954
6955 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
6956 i.e. comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
6957 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
6958 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
6959 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
6960
6961 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
6962 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
6963 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
6964 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e. Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
6965 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
6966 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
6967 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
6968
6969 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
6970 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
6971 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
6972 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
6973 more info.
6974
6975
6976 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6977 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
6978 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6979 @chapter Limitations and Known Bugs
6980 @cindex limitations
6981 @cindex bugs
6982 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6983
6984 @itemize @bullet
6985 @item
6986 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
6987 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
6988 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
6989 and are now utterly obsolete.)
6990
6991 @item
6992 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
6993 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
6994 editing.
6995
6996 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
6997 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
6998 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
6999 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
7000 intention to change this goal.
7001
7002 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
7003 other tool instead, e.g. @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
7004 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
7005 @ccmode{}.
7006
7007 @item
7008 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7009 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7010 it and font-locks it OK. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7011 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7012 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7013
7014 @item
7015 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function
7016 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming
7017 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at
7018 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been
7019 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file
7020 might be incorrectly indented or fontified.
7021
7022 @item
7023 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
7024
7025 @example
7026 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
7027 @end example
7028
7029 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
7030 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
7031 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
7032 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
7033 early on:
7034
7035 @example
7036 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
7037 (require "cc-fonts"))
7038 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
7039 @end example
7040 @end itemize
7041
7042 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7043 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
7044 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7045 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
7046 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7047
7048 @itemize @bullet
7049 @item
7050 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
7051
7052 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
7053
7054 @item
7055 @kindex RET
7056 @kindex C-j
7057 @emph{Why doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
7058
7059 Emacs' convention is that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
7060 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. You can make @kbd{RET} do this
7061 too by adding this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7062
7063 @example
7064 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
7065 @end example
7066
7067 @xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want
7068 this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS! @t{:-)}
7069
7070 @item
7071 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
7072
7073 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
7074 Started}.
7075
7076 @item
7077 @kindex C-x h
7078 @kindex C-M-\
7079 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
7080
7081 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
7082 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
7083
7084 @item
7085 @kindex C-M-q
7086 @kindex C-M-u
7087 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
7088
7089 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
7090 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
7091 Commands}.
7092
7093 @item
7094 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
7095 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
7096 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
7097
7098 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
7099 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
7100 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
7101 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
7102 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
7103 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
7104
7105 @example
7106 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
7107 @end example
7108
7109 @item
7110 @cindex open paren in column zero
7111 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
7112 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
7113 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
7114
7115 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
7116 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
7117 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
7118 @ifset XEMACS
7119 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
7120 @end ifset
7121 @ifclear XEMACS
7122 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
7123 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
7124 @end ifclear
7125
7126 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
7127 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
7128 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
7129 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
7130 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
7131
7132 @end itemize
7133
7134
7135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7136 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
7137 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7138 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
7139 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7140
7141 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
7142 of XEmacs since 19.16.
7143
7144 @cindex web site
7145 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
7146 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
7147 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
7148 compatibility, etc. are all available on the web site:
7149
7150 @quotation
7151 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
7152 @end quotation
7153
7154
7155 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7156 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
7157 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7158 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
7159 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7160
7161 @kindex C-c C-b
7162 @findex c-submit-bug-report
7163 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
7164 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
7165 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
7166 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
7167 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
7168 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
7169 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
7170 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7171 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7172
7173 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7174 customizations loaded (i.e. start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7175 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7176 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7177 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
7178 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
7179
7180 @cindex bug report mailing list
7181 Bug reports should be sent to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can
7182 also send other questions and suggestions (kudos? @t{;-)} to that
7183 address. It's a mailing list which you can join or browse an archive
7184 of; see the web site at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for
7185 further details.
7186
7187 @cindex announcement mailing list
7188 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
7189 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
7190 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
7191 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
7192 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
7193 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
7194 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
7195 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
7196 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
7197
7198
7199 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
7200 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7201 @include doclicense.texi
7202
7203
7204 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
7205 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7206 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
7207 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7208 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
7209 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7210
7211 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
7212 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7213 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7214 @iftex
7215 @sp 2
7216 @end iftex
7217 @printindex fn
7218
7219
7220 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7221 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
7222 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7223 @unnumbered Variable Index
7224 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7225
7226 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
7227 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7228 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7229 @iftex
7230 @sp 2
7231 @end iftex
7232 @printindex vr
7233
7234
7235 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7236 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
7237 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7238 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
7239 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7240
7241 @printindex cp
7242
7243
7244 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7245 @comment Epilogue.
7246 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7247
7248 @bye